WO2022189571A1 - Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition - Google Patents

Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022189571A1
WO2022189571A1 PCT/EP2022/056196 EP2022056196W WO2022189571A1 WO 2022189571 A1 WO2022189571 A1 WO 2022189571A1 EP 2022056196 W EP2022056196 W EP 2022056196W WO 2022189571 A1 WO2022189571 A1 WO 2022189571A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
chosen
group
radical
weight
alkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2022/056196
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Lindsay Menzer
Alexis LIARD
Jean-Daniel Debain
Fanny CARDONNEL
Original Assignee
L'oreal
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by L'oreal filed Critical L'oreal
Publication of WO2022189571A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022189571A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/72—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K8/84—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions otherwise than those involving only carbon-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • A61K8/87—Polyurethanes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/19—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing inorganic ingredients
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/33—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing oxygen
    • A61K8/34—Alcohols
    • A61K8/345—Alcohols containing more than one hydroxy group
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/40—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing nitrogen
    • A61K8/41—Amines
    • A61K8/416—Quaternary ammonium compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/4973—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with oxygen as the only hetero atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/72—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K8/84—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions otherwise than those involving only carbon-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • A61K8/89—Polysiloxanes
    • A61K8/891—Polysiloxanes saturated, e.g. dimethicone, phenyl trimethicone, C24-C28 methicone or stearyl dimethicone
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61Q—SPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q5/00—Preparations for care of the hair
    • A61Q5/08—Preparations for bleaching the hair
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2800/00—Properties of cosmetic compositions or active ingredients thereof or formulation aids used therein and process related aspects
    • A61K2800/40—Chemical, physico-chemical or functional or structural properties of particular ingredients
    • A61K2800/42—Colour properties
    • A61K2800/43—Pigments; Dyes
    • A61K2800/432—Direct dyes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61Q—SPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q5/00—Preparations for care of the hair
    • A61Q5/06—Preparations for styling the hair, e.g. by temporary shaping or colouring
    • A61Q5/065—Preparations for temporary colouring the hair, e.g. direct dyes

Definitions

  • TITLE Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition
  • the present invention relates to a process for removing the colour from previously coloured hair keratin fibers comprising the application of at least one colour-removing composition to said hair keratin fibers, which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition comprising a (poly)carbodiimide compound and at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, said colour-removing composition comprising at least one surfactant and at least one polyol.
  • the invention also relates to a composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
  • the present invention also relates to the use of the colour-removing composition according to the invention, or as used in the context of the process according to the invention, on hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
  • Another colouring method consists in using pigments. Specifically, the use of pigment on the surface of hair keratin fibers generally makes it possible to obtain visible colourings on dark hair, since the surface pigment masks the natural colour of the fiber.
  • This colouring method may also make it possible to have available colour compositions which have the advantage of producing a uniform coloured coating on hair keratin fibers, notably the hair, while at the same time forming a coat which withstands shampoo washing and the various attacking factors to which the hair may be subjected such as brushing and/or friction, without degradation of the hair.
  • the aim of the present invention is to develop a process for treating hair keratin fibers which makes it possible to obtain very good efficiency as regards hair colour removal.
  • colour-removing composition comprising:
  • At least one surfactant preferably a cationic surfactant
  • the invention also relates to a composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
  • the invention also relates to the use of the colour-removing composition according to the invention, or as used in the context of the process according to the invention, on hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
  • the invention is not limited to the illustrated examples.
  • the characteristics of the various examples may notably be combined within variants which are not illustrated.
  • an “alkyl” radical denotes a linear or branched saturated radical containing, for example, from 1 to 20 carbon atoms;
  • an “ aminoalkyl ” radical denotes an alkyl radical as defined previously, said alkyl radical comprising an NFh group;
  • a “ hydroxy alky G radical denotes an alkyl radical as defined previously, said alkyl radical comprising an OH group;
  • alkylene denotes a linear or branched divalent saturated C2-C4 hydrocarbon-based group such as methylene, ethylene or propylene;
  • cycloalkyl or “alley cloalky G radical denotes a cyclic saturated monocyclic or bicyclic, preferably monocyclic, hydrocarbon-based group comprising from 1 to 3 rings, preferably 2 rings, and comprising from 3 to 24 carbon atoms, in particular comprising from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more particularly from 3 to 13 carbon atoms, even more particularly from 3 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably between 5 and 10 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or norbomyl, in particular cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl, it being understood that the cycloalkyl radical may be substituted with one or more (Ci-C4)alkyl groups such as methyl; preferably, the cycloalkyl radical is then an isobornyl group;
  • cycloalkylene denotes a divalent cycloalkyl group with “ cycloalkyl ” as defined previously, preferably of C3-C12;
  • an “aryl” radical is a monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic, fused or non-fused, unsaturated and aromatic hydrocarbon-based cyclic radical, comprising from 6 to 14 carbon atoms, preferably between 6 and 12 carbon atoms; preferably, the aryl group comprises 1 ring of 6 carbon atoms such as phenyl, naphthyl, anthryl, phenanthryl and biphenyl, it being understood that the aryl radical may be substituted with one or more (Ci-C4)alkyl groups such as methyl, preferably tolyl, xylyl, or methylnaphthyl; preferably, the aryl group represents phenyl;
  • arylene is a divalent aryl radical with “aryl” as defined previously; preferably, arylene represents phenylene;
  • heterocyclic radical denotes a saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic or aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon-based radical, comprising one or more heteroatoms, preferably from 1 to 5 atoms chosen from O, S or N, including from 3 to 20 ring members, preferably between 5 and 10 ring members, such as imidazolyl, pyrrolyl and furanyl;
  • heterocycloalkylene radical is a divalent heterocyclic group with “ heterocyclic ” as defined previously;
  • an “ alkoxy ” radical denotes an alkyl-oxy radical with “alkyl” as defined previously;
  • - an “acyloxy ” radical denotes an ester radical R-C(0)-0- with R being an alkyl group as defined previously;
  • a “ reactive ” group is a group that is capable of forming a covalent bond with another identical or different group, by chemical reaction.
  • hair keratin fibers means the hair.
  • hair means the hair of the head. It does not refer to eyelashes, eyebrows and body hair.
  • colour-removing composition is equivalent to “composition for removing (the) colour from hair keratin fibers” and to “composition for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers”.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound.
  • the composition may comprise at least two different (poly)carbodiimide compounds, present as a mixture in the composition.
  • (poly) carbodiimide compound means a compound comprising one or more carbodiimide groups, preferably at least two carbodiimide groups, more preferentially at least three carbodiimide groups; in particular, the number of carbodiimide groups does not exceed 200, preferably 150, more preferentially 100.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) according to the invention may optionally comprise in their structure one or more reactive groups different from carbodiimide groups, chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane
  • the reactive group(s) other than the carbodiimide groups may be side or end groups.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) comprise one or more end groups different from carbodiimide groups, preferably one or more end groups chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (I) below:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
  • Ri and R2 independently represent a group chosen from a hydrocarbon-based radical, preferably alkyl, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, a group chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropan
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000
  • - A is a monomer chosen from the compounds below:
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (la) below: in which:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
  • Y2 independently represent a divalent organic radical chosen from a saturated Ci to C36 aliphatic group or a Ce to C24 aromatic or alkylaromatic group, the aliphatic or aromatic group optionally comprising one or more non-pendent heteroatoms, such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or combinations thereof;
  • - Zi and Z2 independently represent a reactive end group or an inert end group
  • Zi and Z2 may represent, independently, a saturated, linear or branched or cyclic Ci to C50 aliphatic group, or a Ce to Cis aromatic group, said aliphatic and aromatic groups optionally comprising from 1 to 10 heteroatoms chosen from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and combinations thereof, and the aliphatic or aromatic group may be partially or totally fluorinated; in this variant, Zi and Z2 comprise a bonding group CG connecting Zi to Yi and Z2 to Y2, the group CG possibly being a single covalent bond, a saturated C-C bond, an unsaturated covalent C-C bond, an amide group, an ester group, a carbonate group, a thioester group, an ether group, a urethane group, a thiourethane group or a urea group;
  • Zi and Z2 may be chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxy silyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxy alkyl silyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbomenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups;
  • - Q represents an organopolymer or an organooligomer comprising repeating units of saturated, linear or branched or cyclic aliphatic groups, or of aromatic groups or alkylaromatic groups, coupled via carbonate, ester, ether, amide, urethane or urea repeating bonds or combinations thereof;
  • - A represents a divalent aliphatic, aromatic, alkylaromatic or linear, saturated, branched or cyclic radical containing from 2 to 30 carbon atoms, which may optionally comprise one or more non-pendent heteroatoms such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or combinations thereof, in the aliphatic chain or the aromatic chain;
  • - r denotes an integer equal to 0 or 1 ;
  • - m denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, preferably equal to 0 or 1;
  • - m denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, preferably equal to 0 or 1;
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, preferably equal to 0 or 1, with m+ (m’*n ) 3 2.
  • Zi and Z2 independently represent a reactive end group; more preferentially, Zi and Z2 independently represent a group chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbomenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups.
  • Such (poly)carbodiimide compounds are sold, for example, by the company Stahl B.V, under the name Permutex XR, or under the name RelcaLinklO., under the name Picassian XL and Nisshinbo compounds sold under the name Carbodilite with the series V-02, V-02-L2, SV-02, E-02, V-10, SW-12G, E-03A, E-04DG-T, E-05, V-
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) below:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
  • - Ri and R2 independently represent a hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
  • n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 3;
  • - Li independently represents a Ci-Cis divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof;
  • - E independently represents a group chosen from:
  • R3 and R4 independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
  • R5 independently represents a covalent bond or a saturated divalent hydrocarbon- based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
  • hydrocarbon-based radical independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
  • hydrocarbon-based radical means a saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched radical containing from 1 to 300 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 250 carbon atoms, more preferentially from 1 to 200 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon-based radical is a saturated linear radical.
  • the hydrocarbon-based radical may comprise one or more cyclic groups.
  • the hydrocarbon-based radical may be interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, in particular chosen from O, S or N and/or substituted with one or more cations, anions or zwitterions or cationic groups such as ammonium, anionic groups such as carboxylate, or zwitterionic groups, and/or comprising a metal ion which may be incorporated in the form of a salt.
  • heteroatom(s ) means an oxygen O, sulfur S or nitrogen N atom, and also halogen atoms such as Cl, F, Br and I. If the heteroatom is included in the chain of the hydrocarbon-based radical, the heteroatom is preferably chosen from oxygen O, sulfur S or nitrogen N atoms.
  • Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom.
  • Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxy carboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof.
  • Ri and R2 are independently chosen from groups
  • R11 represents a Ci-C4alkyl group and R12 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group; preferably, R11 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and R12 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl.
  • Ri and R2 independently represent a compound of formula (VI) in which Ri 3 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
  • Ri and R2 are different and one of the radicals Ri or R2 represents a compound of formula (IV) as described above and the other radical Ri or R2 represents a compound of formula (VI) as described above.
  • R9 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and Rio is a hydrogen atom or a methyl and p is equal to 1.
  • R13 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and Ri4 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
  • Ri and R2 are identical and represent a compound of formula (VI) in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
  • n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 20, more preferentially from 2 to 20.
  • z denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 20, more preferentially from 2 to 20.
  • w is equal to 1.
  • w is equal to 1
  • n+z denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 10.
  • Li is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical such as methylene, ethylene and propylene, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene and cyclohexylene, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group such as imidazolene, pyrrol ene and furanylene, or a C6-C14 arylene group such as phenylene, and mixtures thereof.
  • a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical such as methylene, ethylene and propylene
  • a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene and cyclohexylene
  • a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group such as imidazolene, pyrrol ene and furanylene
  • a C6-C14 arylene group such as phenylene
  • Li may be chosen from a radical derived from tolylene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, 2,2,4- trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,12-dodecane diisocyanate, norbornane diisocyanate, 2,4-bis(8-isocyanatooctyl)-l,3-dioctylcyclobutane, 4,4’- dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate, tetramethylxylylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, 1,5-napththylene diisocyanate, 4,4’-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 4,4’- diphenyldimethylmethane diisocyanate and phenylene diisocyanate, and mixtures thereof.
  • Li is chosen from a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof, such as the compounds of formula (VII) below:
  • LI is 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane corresponding to formula (VIII) below: (VIII).
  • Li is not the m-tetramethylxylylene radical represented by formula (IX) below:
  • E independently represents a group chosen from: - -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R 6 )-R4-N(R 6 )-R 5 -; in which R3 and R4 independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
  • R5 independently represents a covalent bond or a saturated divalent hydrocarbon- based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
  • R6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
  • R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene
  • C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene
  • Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, butylene, propylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
  • Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • arylene radical such as phenylene
  • C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene
  • Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • arylene radical such as phenylene
  • C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene
  • Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 is chosen from a C 6 - C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, butylene, propylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is a copolymer derived from a-methylstyryl isocyanates of formula (X) below:
  • R independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group containing from 3 to 24 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 24 carbon atoms, and n denotes an integer ranging from 2 to 100.
  • alkyl group is as defined previously.
  • cycloalkyl group is as defined previously.
  • n may denote an integer ranging from 2 to 50, preferably from 3 to 30 and even more preferentially from 5 to 10.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is a compound of formula (XI) below: in which R independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group containing from 3 to 24 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group the “cycloalkyl group” and the “aryl group” are as defined previously.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (I) or of formula (II) in which:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom
  • Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxycarboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof, preferably monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, more preferentially the compound of formula (VI) as described previously in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom, and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30;
  • n and z when they are present, denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
  • - Li when it is present, is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof, preferably a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical;
  • - A when it is present, is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof, preferably a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical;
  • - E when it is present, independently represents a group chosen from:
  • R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C1-C18 alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
  • Rs when it is present, is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C1-C18 alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
  • R6 when it is present, is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C1-C18 alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom
  • Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxycarboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof;
  • n+z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
  • - Li is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof;
  • - E independently represents a group chosen from:
  • R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C I-C IX alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
  • Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
  • R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom
  • Ri and R2 are, independently, monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed;
  • n+z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
  • - Li is a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical
  • - E independently represents a group chosen from:
  • R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
  • Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
  • R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom
  • n and z denote an integer ranging from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10 and w is equal to 1;
  • - Li is an C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene, cyclohexylene and 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane;
  • - E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
  • - Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom
  • n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, preferably from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10 and w is equal to 1;
  • - Li is an C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene, cyclohexylene and 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane, preferably 4,4- dicyclohexylenemethane; and
  • - E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, propylene, butylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compound is a compound of formula (XII) below:
  • n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, preferably from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10
  • E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, propylene, butylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and r and s denote an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
  • the total amount of the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s), present in the hair colouring composition preferably ranges from 0.01% to 30% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 25% by weight, better still from 0.2% to 20% by weight and even better still from 1% to 10% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises one or more pigments.
  • pigment refers to any pigment that gives colour to keratinous materials. Their solubility in water at 25°C and at atmospheric pressure (760 mmHg) is less than 0.05% by weight, and preferably less than 0.01%.
  • the pigments that may be used are notably chosen from the organic and/or mineral pigments known in the art, notably those described in Kirk-Othmer’s Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology and in Ullmann’s Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemistry.
  • They may be natural, of natural origin, or non-natural.
  • These pigments may be in pigment powder or paste form. They may be coated or uncoated.
  • the pigments may be chosen, for example, from mineral pigments, organic pigments, lakes, pigments with special effects such as nacres or glitter flakes, and mixtures thereof.
  • the pigment may be a mineral pigment.
  • mineral pigment refers to any pigment that satisfies the definition in Ullmann’s encyclopaedia in the chapter on inorganic pigments.
  • the pigment may be an organic pigment.
  • organic pigment refers to any pigment that satisfies the definition in Ullmann’s encyclopaedia in the chapter on organic pigments.
  • the organic pigment may notably be chosen from nitroso, nitro, azo, xanthene, pyrene, quinoleine, quinoline, anthraquinone, triphenylmethane, fluorane, phthalocyanine, metal-complex, isoindolinone, isoindoline, quinacridone, perinone, perylene, diketopyrrolopyrrole, indigo, thioindigo, dioxazine, triphenylmethane and quinophthalone compounds.
  • the white or coloured organic pigments may be chosen from carmine, carbon black, aniline black, azo yellow, quinacridone, phthalocyanine blue, the blue pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 42090, 69800, 69825, 74100, 74160, the yellow pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 11680, 11710, 19140, 20040, 21100, 21108, 47000, 47005, the green pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 61565, 61570, 74260, the orange pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 11725, 45370, 71105, the red pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 12085, 12120, 12370, 12420, 12490, 14700, 15525, 15580, 15620, 15630, 15800, 15850, 15865, 15880, 26100, 45380, 45410, 58000, 73360, 73915, 75470, the pigments obtained
  • the pigments in accordance with the invention may also be in the form of composite pigments, as described in patent EP 1 184 426.
  • These composite pigments may be composed notably of particles including an inorganic core, at least one binder for attaching the organic pigments to the core, and at least one organic pigment which at least partially covers the core.
  • the organic pigment may also be a lake.
  • the term “lake” means dyes adsorbed onto insoluble particles, the assembly thus obtained remaining insoluble during use.
  • the inorganic substrates onto which the dyes are adsorbed are, for example, alumina, silica, calcium sodium borosilicate or calcium aluminium borosilicate and aluminium.
  • D&C Red 21 (Cl 45 380), D&C Orange 5 (Cl 45 370), D&C Red 27 (Cl 45 410), D&C Orange 10 (Cl 45 425), D&C Red 3 (Cl 45 430), D&C Red 4 (Cl 15 510), D&C Red 33 (Cl 17 200), D&C Yellow 5 (Cl 19 140), D&C Yellow 6 (Cl 15 985), D&C Green 5 (Cl 61 570), D&C Yellow 10 (Cl 77 002), D&C Green 3 (Cl 42053), D&C Blue 1 (Cl 42 090).
  • the pigment may also be a special effect pigment.
  • special effect pigments means pigments that generally create a coloured appearance (characterized by a certain shade, a certain vivacity and a certain level of luminance) that is non- uniform and that changes as a function of the conditions of observation (light, temperature, angles of observation, etc.). They thereby differ from coloured pigments, which afford a standard uniform opaque, semi-transparent or transparent shade.
  • special effect pigments those with a low refractive index, such as fluorescent or photochromic pigments, and those with a higher refractive index, such as nacres, interference pigments or glitter flakes.
  • pigments with special effects include nacreous pigments such as mica covered with titanium or with bismuth oxychloride, coloured nacreous pigments such as mica covered with titanium and with iron oxides, mica covered with iron oxide, mica covered with titanium and notably with ferric blue or with chromium oxide, mica covered with titanium and with an organic pigment as defined previously, and also nacreous pigments based on bismuth oxychloride.
  • Nacreous pigments that may be mentioned include the nacres Cellini sold by BASF (mica-TiCk-lake), Prestige sold by Eckart (mica-TiCk), Prestige Bronze sold by Eckart (mica-Fe2Ck) and Colorona sold by Merck (mica-TiCk-FeiCk).
  • particles including a borosilicate substrate coated with titanium oxide.
  • Particles comprising a glass substrate coated with titanium oxide are notably sold under the name Metashine MC1080RY by the company Toyal.
  • nacres examples include polyethylene terephthalate glitter flakes, notably those sold by the company Meadowbrook Inventions under the name Silver IP 0.004X0.004 (silver glitter flakes). It is also possible to envisage multilayer pigments based on synthetic substrates, such as alumina, silica, calcium sodium borosilicate, calcium aluminium borosilicate and aluminium.
  • the pigments with special effects may also be chosen from reflective particles, i.e. notably from particles whose size, structure, notably the thickness of the layer(s) of which they are made and their physical and chemical nature, and surface state, allow them to reflect incident light.
  • This reflection may, where appropriate, have an intensity sufficient to create at the surface of the composition or of the mixture, when it is applied to the support to be made up, highlight points that are visible to the naked eye, i.e. brighter points that contrast with their environment, making them appear to sparkle.
  • the reflective particles may be selected so as not to significantly alter the colouring effect generated by the colouring agents with which they are combined, and more particularly so as to optimize this effect in terms of colour rendition. They may more particularly have a yellow, pink, red, bronze, orange, brown, gold and/or coppery colour or tint.
  • These particles may have varied forms and may notably be in platelet or globular form, in particular in spherical form.
  • the reflective particles may or may not have a multilayer structure and, in the case of a multilayer structure, may have, for example, at least one layer of uniform thickness, notably of a reflective material.
  • the reflective particles do not have a multilayer structure, they may be composed, for example, of metal oxides, notably titanium or iron oxides obtained synthetically.
  • the reflective particles may include, for example, a natural or synthetic substrate, notably a synthetic substrate at least partially coated with at least one layer of a reflective material, notably of at least one metal or metallic material.
  • the substrate may be made of one or more organic and/or mineral materials.
  • glasses More particularly, it may be chosen from glasses, ceramics, graphite, metal oxides, aluminas, silicas, silicates, notably aluminosilicates and borosilicates, and synthetic mica, and mixtures thereof, this list not being limiting.
  • the reflective material may include a layer of metal or of a metallic material.
  • Reflective particles are notably described in JP-A-09188830, JP-A-10158450, JP-A-10158541, JP-A-07258460 and JP-A-05017710.
  • reflective particles including a mineral substrate coated with a layer of metal
  • Particles with a silver-coated glass substrate in the form of platelets, are sold under the name Microglass Metashine REFSX 2025 PS by the company Toyal.
  • Particles with a glass substrate coated with nickel/chromium/molybdenum alloy are sold under the names Crystal Star GF 550 and GF 2525 by this same company.
  • Use may also be made of particles comprising a metal substrate, such as silver, aluminium, iron, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, gold, copper, zinc, tin, magnesium, steel, bronze or titanium, said substrate being coated with at least one layer of at least one metal oxide, such as titanium oxide, aluminium oxide, iron oxide, cerium oxide, chromium oxide, silicon oxides and mixtures thereof.
  • a metal substrate such as silver, aluminium, iron, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, gold, copper, zinc, tin, magnesium, steel, bronze or titanium
  • said substrate being coated with at least one layer of at least one metal oxide, such as titanium oxide, aluminium oxide, iron oxide, cerium oxide, chromium oxide, silicon oxides and mixtures thereof.
  • Examples that may be mentioned include aluminium powder, bronze powder or copper powder coated with S1O2 sold under the name Visionaire by the company Eckart.
  • Pigments with an interference effect which are not attached to a substrate, such as liquid crystals (Helicones HC from Wacker) or interference holographic glitter flakes (Geometric Pigments or Spectra f/x from Spectratek).
  • Pigments with special effects also comprise fluorescent pigments, whether these are substances that are fluorescent in daylight or that produce an ultraviolet fluorescence, phosphorescent pigments, photochromic pigments, thermochromic pigments and quantum dots, sold, for example, by the company Quantum Dots Corporation.
  • the variety of pigments that may be used in the present invention makes it possible to obtain a wide range of colours, and also particular optical effects such as metallic effects or interference effects.
  • the size of the pigment used in the composition according to the present invention is generally between 10 nm and 200 pm, preferably between 20 nm and 80 pm and more preferentially between 30 nm and 50 pm.
  • the pigments may be dispersed in the composition by means of a dispersant.
  • the dispersant serves to protect the dispersed particles against their agglomeration or flocculation.
  • This dispersant may be a surfactant, an oligomer, a polymer or a mixture of several thereof, bearing one or more functionalities with strong affinity for the surface of the particles to be dispersed. In particular, they may become physically or chemically attached to the surface of the pigments.
  • These dispersants also contain at least one functional group that is compatible with or soluble in the continuous medium.
  • esters of 12-hydroxy stearic acid in particular and of C8 to C20 fatty acid and of polyols such as glycerol or diglycerol are used, such as poly(12-hydroxystearic acid) stearate with a molecular weight of about 750 g/mol, such as the product sold under the name Solsperse 21 000 by the company Avecia, polyglyceryl-2 dipolyhydroxystearate (CTFA name) sold under the reference Dehymyls PGPH by the company Henkel, or polyhydroxystearic acid such as the product sold under the reference Arlacel PI 00 by the company Uniqema, and mixtures thereof.
  • poly(12-hydroxystearic acid) stearate with a molecular weight of about 750 g/mol such as the product sold under the name Solsperse 21 000 by the company Avecia, polyglyceryl-2 dipolyhydroxystearate (CTFA name) sold under the reference Dehymyls PGPH by the company
  • dispersants that may be used in the compositions of the invention, mention may be made of quaternary ammonium derivatives of polycondensed fatty acids, for instance Solsperse 17 000 sold by the company Avecia, and polydimethylsiloxane/oxypropylene mixtures such as those sold by the company Dow Corning under the references DC2-5185 and DC2-5225 C.
  • the pigments used in the composition may be surface-treated with an organic agent.
  • the pigments surface-treated beforehand that are useful in the context of the invention are pigments which have been completely or partially subjected to a surface treatment of chemical, electronic, electrochemical, mechanochemical or mechanical nature with an organic agent, such as those described notably in Cosmetics and Toiletries , February 1990, Vol. 105, pages 53-64, before being dispersed in the composition in accordance with the invention.
  • organic agents may be chosen, for example, from waxes, for example camauba wax and beeswax; fatty acids, fatty alcohols and derivatives thereof, such as stearic acid, hydroxystearic acid, stearyl alcohol, hydroxystearyl alcohol and lauric acid and derivatives thereof; anionic surfactants; lecithins; sodium, potassium, magnesium, iron, titanium, zinc or aluminium salts of fatty acids, for example aluminium stearate or laurate; metal alkoxides; polyethylene; (meth)acrylic polymers, for example polymethyl methacrylates; polymers and copolymers containing acrylate units; alkanolamines; silicone compounds, for example silicones, notably polydimethylsiloxanes; organofluorine compounds, for example perfluoroalkyl ethers; fluorosilicone compounds.
  • waxes for example camauba wax and beeswax
  • fatty acids, fatty alcohols and derivatives thereof such
  • the surface-treated pigments that are useful in the composition may also have been treated with a mixture of these compounds and/or may have undergone several surface treatments.
  • the surface-treated pigments that are useful in the context of the present invention may be prepared according to surface-treatment techniques that are well known to those skilled in the art, or may be commercially available as is.
  • the surface-treated pigments are coated with an organic layer.
  • the organic agent with which the pigments are treated may be deposited on the pigments by evaporation of solvent, chemical reaction between the molecules of the surface agent or creation of a covalent bond between the surface agent and the pigments.
  • the surface treatment may thus be performed, for example, by chemical reaction of a surface agent with the surface of the pigments and creation of a covalent bond between the surface agent and the pigments or the fillers. This method is notably described in patent US 4 578 266.
  • An organic agent covalently bonded to the pigments will preferably be used.
  • the agent for the surface treatment may represent from 0.1% to 50% by weight of the total weight of the surface-treated pigment, preferably from 0.5% to 30% by weight and even more preferentially from 1% to 20% by weight of the total weight of the surface-treated pigment.
  • the surface treatments of the pigments are chosen from the following treatments:
  • methicone treatment for instance the SI surface treatment sold by LCW;
  • dimethicone treatment for instance the Covasil 3.05 surface treatment sold by LCW;
  • a dimethicone/trimethyl siloxysilicate treatment for instance the Covasil 4.05 surface treatment sold by LCW
  • a magnesium myri state treatment for instance the MM surface treatment sold by LCW
  • an aluminium dimyristate treatment such as the MI surface treatment sold by Miyoshi;
  • an isostearyl sebacate treatment for instance the HS surface treatment sold by Miyoshi;
  • an acrylate/dimethicone copolymer and perfluoroalkyl phosphate treatment for instance the FSA surface treatment sold by Daito;
  • a polymethylhydrogenosiloxane/perfluoroalkyl phosphate treatment for instance the FS01 surface treatment sold by Daito;
  • an acrylate/dimethicone copolymer treatment for instance the ASC surface treatment sold by Daito;
  • an isopropyl titanium triisostearate treatment for instance the ITT surface treatment sold by Daito;
  • an acrylate copolymer treatment for instance the APD surface treatment sold by Daito;
  • PF + ITT surface treatment sold by Daito.
  • the dispersant is present with organic or mineral pigments in submicron-sized particulate form.
  • micron or “submicronic” refers to pigments having a particle size that has been micronized by a micronization method and having a mean particle size of less than a micrometre (pm), in particular between 0.1 and 0.9 pm, and preferably between 0.2 and 0.6 pm.
  • pm micrometre
  • the dispersant and the pigment(s) are present in an amount (dispersanfpigment), according to a weight ratio, of between 1 :4 and 4:1, particularly between 1.5:3.5 and 3.5:1 or better still between 1.75:3 and 3:1.
  • the dispersant(s) may thus have a silicone backbone, such as silicone polyether and dispersants of amino silicone type.
  • a silicone backbone such as silicone polyether and dispersants of amino silicone type.
  • suitable dispersants that may be mentioned are: - amino silicones, i.e. silicones comprising one or more amino groups such as those sold under the names and references: BYK LPX 21879 by BYK, GP-4, GP-6, GP-344, GP-851, GP-965, GP-967 and GP-988-1, sold by Genesee Polymers,
  • Tego® RC 902 Tego® RC 922, Tego® RC 1041, and Tego® RC 1043, sold by Evonik
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
  • carboxyl groups such as X-22162 and X-22370 by Shin-Etsu
  • epoxy silicones such as GP-29, GP-32, GP-502, GP-504, GP-514, GP-607, GP-682, and GP-695 by Genesee Polymers, or Tego® RC 1401, Tego® RC 1403, Tego® RC 1412 by Evonik.
  • the dispersant(s) are of amino silicone type and are cationic.
  • the pigment(s) are chosen from mineral, mixed mineral-organic or organic pigments.
  • the pigment(s) are organic pigments, preferentially organic pigments surface-treated with an organic agent chosen from silicone compounds.
  • the pigment(s) are mineral pigments.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may comprise one or more direct dyes.
  • direct dye means natural and/or synthetic dyes, other than oxidation dyes. These are dyes that will spread superficially on the fiber.
  • They may be ionic or nonionic, preferably cationic or nonionic.
  • Suitable direct dyes include azo direct dyes; (poly)methine dyes such as cyanines, hemicyanines and styryls; carbonyl dyes; azine dyes; nitro(hetero)aryl dyes; tri(hetero)arylmethane dyes; porphyrin dyes; phthalocyanine dyes and natural direct dyes, alone or in the form of mixtures.
  • the direct dyes are preferably cationic direct dyes. Mention may be made of the hydrazono cationic dyes of formulae (XIII) and (XIV) and the azo cationic dyes
  • Het+ represents a cationic heteroaryl radical, preferentially bearing an endocyclic cationic charge, such as imidazolium, indolium or pyridinium, which is optionally substituted, preferentially with at least one (Ci-Cs) alkyl group such as methyl;
  • - Ar+ represents an aryl radical, such as phenyl or naphthyl, bearing an exocyclic cationic charge, preferentially ammonium, particularly tri(Ci- C8)alkylammonium, such as trimethylammonium;
  • Ar represents an aryl group, notably phenyl, which is optionally substituted, preferentially with one or more electron-donating groups such as i) optionally substituted (Ci-C8)alkyl, ii) optionally substituted (Ci-C8)alkoxy, iii) (di)(Ci- C8)(alkyl)amino optionally substituted on the alkyl group(s) with a hydroxyl group, iv) aryl(Ci-C8)alkylamino, v) optionally substituted N-(Ci-C8)alkyl-N-aryl(Ci- C8)alkylamino or alternatively Ar represents a julolidine group;
  • - Ar represents an optionally substituted (hetero)aryl group, such as phenyl or pyrazolyl, which are optionally substituted, preferentially with one or more (Ci- C8)alkyl, hydroxyl, (di)(Ci-C8)(alkyl)amino, (Ci-C8)alkoxy or phenyl groups;
  • Ra and Rb which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a (Ci-C8)alkyl group, which is optionally substituted, preferentially with a hydroxyl group; or else the substituent Ra with a substituent of Het + and/or Rb with a substituent of Ar form, together with the atoms that bear them, a (hetero)cycloalkyl; in particular, Ra and Rb represent a hydrogen atom or a (Ci-C4)alkyl group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group;
  • - Q- represents an organic or mineral anionic counterion, such as a halide or an alkyl sulfate.
  • R 2 and R 3 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a (Ci-C4)alkyl group, such as methyl;
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an electron-donating group such as optionally substituted (Ci-C8)alkyl, optionally substituted (Ci-Cs)alkoxy, or (di)(Ci- C8)(alkyl)amino optionally substituted on the alkyl group(s) with a hydroxyl group; in particular, R 4 is a hydrogen atom;
  • - Z represents a CH group or a nitrogen atom, preferentially CH
  • - Q- is an anionic counterion as defined previously, in particular a halide, such as chloride, or an alkyl sulfate, such as methyl sulfate or mesyl.
  • a halide such as chloride
  • an alkyl sulfate such as methyl sulfate or mesyl.
  • the dyes of formulae (XV) and (XVI) are chosen from Basic Red
  • Q being an anionic counterion as defined previously, particularly a halide such as chloride, or an alkyl sulfate such as methyl sulfate or mesyl.
  • the direct dyes may be chosen from anionic direct dyes.
  • the anionic direct dyes of the invention are dyes commonly referred to as “acid” direct dyes owing to their affinity for alkaline substances.
  • the term “anionic direct dye” means any direct dye including in its structure at least one CO2R or SO3R substituent with R denoting a hydrogen atom or a cation originating from a metal or an amine, or an ammonium ion.
  • the anionic dyes may be chosen from direct nitro acid dyes, azo acid dyes, azine acid dyes, triarylmethane acid dyes, indoamine acid dyes, anthraquinone acid dyes, indigoid dyes and natural acid dyes.
  • R- 8 , If?, RIO, R’7, R’S, R’ 9 and R’IO which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
  • X, X’ and X which may be identical or different, representing an oxygen or sulfur atom, or NR with R representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
  • aryl(alkyl)amino optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from i) nitro; ii) nitroso; iii) (0)2S(0 )-, M + and iv) alkoxy with M + as defined previously;
  • - cycloalkyl notably cyclohexyl
  • Ar-N N- with Ar representing an optionally substituted aryl group; preferentially a phenyl optionally substituted with one or more alkyl, (0)2S(0 )-, M + or phenylamino groups;
  • W represents a sigma bond s, an oxygen or sulfur atom, or a divalent radical i) -NR- with R as defined previously, or ii) methylene -C(Ra)(Rb)- with Ra and Rb, which may be identical or different, representing a hydrogen atom or an aryl group, or alternatively Ra and Rb form, together with the carbon atom that bears them, a spiro cycloalkyl; preferentially, W represents a sulfur atom or Ra and Rb together form a cyclohexyl; it being understood that formulae (XIX) and (XIX’) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M + or one carboxylate radical (O)CO -, M + on one of the rings A, A’, B, B’ or C; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
  • dyes of formula (XIX) mention may be made of: Acid Red 1, Acid Red 4, Acid Red 13, Acid Red 14, Acid Red 18, Acid Red 27, Acid Red 28, Acid Red 32, Acid Red 33, Acid Red 35, Acid Red 37, Acid Red 40, Acid Red 41, Acid Red 42, Acid Red 44, Pigment Red 57, Acid Red 68, Acid Red 73, Acid Red 135, Acid Red 138, Acid Red 184, Food Red 1, Food Red 13, Acid Orange 6, Acid Orange 7, Acid Orange 10, Acid Orange 19, Acid Orange 20, Acid Orange 24, Yellow 6, Acid Yellow 9, Acid Yellow 36, Acid Yellow 199, Food Yellow 3, Acid Violet 7, Acid Violet 14, Acid Blue 113, Acid Blue 117, Acid Black 1, Acid Brown 4, Acid Brown 20, Acid Black 26, Acid Black 52, Food Black 1, Food Black 2, Food Yellow 3 or Sunset Yellow; and, as examples of dyes of formula (XIX’), mention may be made of: Acid Red 111, Acid Red 134, Acid Yellow 38; b) the pyrazolone anionic azo dyes of formulae (XX) and (XX’): in which formulae
  • Ri2 and Ri3 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, an alkyl group or -(0)2S(0 ), M + with M + as defined previously;
  • - Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a group -C(0)0 , M + with M + as defined previously;
  • - Ri5 represents a hydrogen atom
  • Ri 6 represents an oxo group, in which case R’i 6 is absent, or alternatively Ri5 with Ri 6 together form a double bond;
  • Ri7 and Rix which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom, or a group chosen from: - (0)2S(0 )-, M + with M + as defined previously;
  • Ar represents an optionally substituted aryl group; preferentially a phenyl optionally substituted with one or more alkyl groups;
  • R’ i 6 , R’ 19 and R’20 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or hydroxyl group
  • R21 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or alkoxy group
  • Ra and Rb which may be identical or different, are as defined previously; preferentially, Ra represents a hydrogen atom and Rb represents an aryl group;
  • - Y represents either a hydroxyl group or an oxo group
  • formulae (XX) and (XX’) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M + or one carboxylate radical -C(0)0 , M + on one of the rings D or E; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
  • dyes of formula (XX) mention may be made of: Acid Red 195, Acid Yellow 23, Acid Yellow 27, Acid Yellow 76, and as examples of dyes of formula (XX’), mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 17; c) the anthraquinone dyes of formulae (XXI) and (CCG):
  • R22, R23, R24, R25, R2 6 and R27 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a group chosen from: - alkyl;
  • aryl(alkyl)amino optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from alkyl and (0)2S(0-)-, M + with M + as defined previously;
  • - Z’ represents a hydrogen atom or a group NR28R29 with R28 and R29, which may be identical or different, representing a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
  • - aryl optionally substituted with one or more groups, particularly i) alkyl such as methyl, n-dodecyl, n-butyl; ii) (0)2S(0 )-, M + with M + as defined previously; iii)
  • - cycloalkyl notably cyclohexyl
  • - Z represents a group chosen from hydroxyl and NR’28R’29 with R’28 and R 5 29, which may be identical or different, representing the same atoms or groups as R28 and R29 as defined previously; it being understood that formulae (XXI) and (CCG) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M + or one carboxylate radical C(0)0 , M + ; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
  • dyes of formula (XXI) mention may be made of: Acid Blue 25, Acid Blue 43, Acid Blue 62, Acid Blue 78, Acid Blue 129, Acid Blue 138, Acid Blue 140, Acid Blue 251, Acid Green 25, Acid Green 41, Acid Violet 42, Acid Violet 43, Mordant Red 3; EXT Violet No. 2; and, as an example of a dye of formula (CCG), mention may be made of: Acid Black 48. d) the nitro dyes of formulae (XXII) and (CCIG):
  • RSI and R32 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a group chosen from:
  • R3 0 , R 31 and R 32 represent a hydrogen atom
  • Rc and Rd which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • W is as defined previously; W particularly represents an -NH- group;
  • ALK represents a linear or branched divalent C1-C6 alkylene group; in particular, ALK represents a -CH2-CH2- group;
  • - p represents an integer inclusively between 1 and 5;
  • J represents a nitro or nitroso group; particularly nitro
  • J represents an oxygen or sulfur atom, or a divalent radical -S(0)m- with m representing an integer 1 or 2; preferentially, J represents an -SO2- radical;
  • - M represents a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion; , which may be present or absent, represents a benzo group optionally substituted with one or more groups R30 as defined previously; it being understood that formulae (XXII) and (CCIG) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M + or one carboxylate radical C(0)0 , M + ; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
  • dyes of formula (XXII) mention may be made of: Acid Brown 13 and Acid Orange 3; as examples of dyes of formula (CCIG), mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 1, the sodium salt of 2,4-dinitro-l-naphthol-7-sulfonic acid, 2-piperidino-5-nitrobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-(4’-N,N-(2”-hydroxyethyl)amino-2’- nitro)anilineethanesulfonic acid, 4-P-hydroxyethylamino-3-nitrobenzenesul fonic acid; EXT D&C Yellow 7; e) the triarylmethane dyes of formula (XXIII):
  • R33, R 34 , R 35 and R 36 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted arylalkyl; particularly an alkyl and benzyl group optionally substituted with a group (O)mS(O ' )-, M + with M + and m as defined previously;
  • R37, R38, R39, R40, R41, R42, R43 and R44 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
  • R°-C(X)-X R°-C(X)-X ⁇ R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R° representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or aryl group
  • X, X’ and X which may be identical or different, representing an oxygen or sulfur atom, or NR with R representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
  • R41 with R42 or R42 with R4 3 or R4 3 with R44 together form a fused benzo group: G; with G optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from i) nitro; ii) nitroso; iii) (0)2S(0 )-, M + ; iv) hydroxyl; v) mercapto; vi) (di)(alkyl)amino; vii) R°-C(X)-X’-; viii) R°-X’-C(X)- and ix) R°-X’- C(X)-X”-; with M + , R°, X, X’ and X” as defined previously; in particular, R37 to R40 represent a hydrogen atom, and R41 to R44, which may be identical or different, represent a hydroxyl group or (0)2S(0 )-, M + ; and when R43 with R44 together form a benzo group
  • dyes of formula (XXIII) mention may be made of: Acid Blue 1; Acid Blue 3; Acid Blue 7, Acid Blue 9; Acid Violet 49; Acid Green 3; Acid Green 5 and Acid Green 50. f) the xanthene-based dyes of formula (XXIV): in which formula (XXIV):
  • R45, R46, R47 and R48 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom
  • R49, R50, R51 and R52 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a group chosen from:
  • - (O)CO - M + with M + as defined previously; particularly, R49, R50, Rsi and R52 represent a hydrogen or halogen atom; - G represents an oxygen or sulfur atom or a group NRe with Re as defined previously; particularly, G represents an oxygen atom;
  • - L represents an alkoxide O , M + ; a thioalkoxide S , M + or a group NRf, with Rf representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and M + as defined previously; M + is particularly sodium or potassium;
  • - L’ represents an oxygen or sulfur atom or an ammonium group: N + RfRg, with Rf and Rg, which may be identical or different, representing a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl or aryl group; L’ particularly represents an oxygen atom or a phenylamino group optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or (O)mS(O ' )-, M + groups with m and M + as defined previously;
  • - Q and Q’ which may be identical or different, represent an oxygen or sulfur atom; particularly, Q and Q’ represent an oxygen atom;
  • dyes of formula (XXIV) mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 73; Acid Red 51; Acid Red 52; Acid Red 87; Acid Red 92; Acid Red 95; Acid Violet 9. g) the indole-based dyes of formula (XXV):
  • R53, R54, R55, R56, R57, R58, R59 and R60 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
  • R°-C(X)-X R°-C(X)-X ⁇ R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R° representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or aryl group
  • X, X’ and X which may be identical or different, representing an oxygen or sulfur atom, or NR with R representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
  • - (O)CO - M + with M + as defined previously
  • - G represents an oxygen or sulfur atom or a group NRe with Re as defined previously; particularly, G represents an oxygen atom
  • formula (XXV) comprises at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M + or one carboxylate radical -C(0)0 , M + ; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
  • dyes of formula (XXV) mention may be made of: Acid Blue 74; h) the quinoline-based dyes of formula (XXVI): in which formula (XXVI):
  • - R61 represents a hydrogen or halogen atom or an alkyl group
  • - R62, R 63 and R64 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group (0)2S(0 )-, M + with M + representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion; or alternatively R.6i with R.62, or R.6i with R.64, together form a benzo group optionally substituted with one or more groups (0)2S(0 )-, M + with M + representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion; it being understood that formula (XXVI) comprises at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0-)-, M+, preferentially sodium sulfonate.
  • dyes of formula (XXVI) mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 2, Acid Yellow 3 and Acid Yellow 5.
  • the direct dyes are chosen from anionic direct dyes.
  • the colouring agent(s) may be present in a total content ranging from 0.001% to 20% by weight and preferably from 0.005% to 15% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition, preferably, the colouring agent(s) are chosen from pigments.
  • the pigment(s) may be present in a total content ranging from 0.05% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 15% by weight and better still from 0.5% to 10% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the direct dye(s) may be present in a total content ranging from 0.001% to 10% by weight relative to the total weight of the composition, preferably from 0.005% to 5% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one non-carboxylic anionic thickener.
  • non-carboxylic agent means an agent which does not comprise any carboxylic acid functions (-COOH) or carboxylate functions (-COO ).
  • thickener means a compound which increases the viscosity of a composition into which it is introduced to a concentration of 0.05% by weight relative to the total weight of the composition, by at least 20 cps, preferably by at least 50 cps, at room temperature (25°C), at atmospheric pressure and at a shear rate of 1 s 1 (the viscosity may be measured using a cone/plate viscometer, a Haake R600 rheometer or the like).
  • non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) are chosen from non- carboxylic anionic polymers, more preferentially from anionic polymers bearing (a) sulfonic group(s).
  • anionic polymer means a polymer comprising one or more anionic or anionizable groups, and not comprising any cationic or cationizable groups.
  • non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) are chosen from anionic polymers including at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer bearing a sulfonic group, in free form or partially or totally neutralized form.
  • These polymers may be crosslinked or non-crosslinked. They are preferably crosslinked.
  • These polymers may be associative or non-associative, preferably non- associative.
  • sociative polymers are polymers that are capable, in an aqueous medium, of reversibly associating with each other or with other molecules.
  • Their chemical structure more particularly comprises at least one hydrophilic zone and at least one hydrophobic zone.
  • hydrophobic group means a radical or polymer with a saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched hydrocarbon-based chain, comprising at least 8 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, in particular from 12 to 30 carbon atoms and more preferentially from 18 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon-based group is derived from a monofunctional compound.
  • the hydrophobic group may be derived from a fatty alcohol such as stearyl alcohol, dodecyl alcohol or decyl alcohol. It may also denote a hydrocarbon-based polymer, for instance polybutadiene.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated monomers bearing a sulfonic group are notably chosen from vinylsulfonic acid, styrenesulfonic acid, (meth)acrylamido(Ci- C22)alkylsulfonic acids, N-(Ci-C22)alkyl(meth)acrylamido(Ci-C22)alkylsulfonic acids such as undecylacrylamidomethanesulfonic acid, and also partially or totally neutralized forms thereof.
  • (Meth)acrylamido(Ci-C22)alkylsulfonic acids for instance acrylamidomethanesulfonic acid, acrylamidoethanesulfonic acid, acrylamidopropanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, methacrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-n-butanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2,4,4-trimethylpentanesulfonic acid, 2-methacrylamidododecylsulfonic acid or 2-acrylamido-2,6-dimethyl-3-heptanesulfonic acid, and also partially or totally neutralized forms thereof, will more preferentially be used.
  • APMS 2-Acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid
  • 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid copolymers mention may be made of partially or totally neutralized crosslinked copolymers of 2- acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid and of acrylamide; mention may be made in particular of the product described in Example 1 of EP 503 853, and reference may be made to said document as regards these polymers.
  • copolymers of 2-acrylamido-2- methylpropanesulfonic acid or salts thereof and of hydroxyethyl acrylate such as the compound sold under the name Sepinov EMT 10 by the company SEPPIC (ESICI name: hydroxyethylacrylate/sodium acryloyldimethyl taurate copolymer).
  • the associative AMPS polymers may notably be chosen from statistical associative AMPS polymers modified by reaction with a Ce-Cn n-monoalkylamine or di-n-alkylamine, and such as those described in patent application WO 00/31154 (forming an integral part of the content of the description). These polymers may also contain other ethylenically unsaturated hydrophilic monomers chosen, for example, from (meth)acrylic acid derivatives, such as esters thereof obtained with monoalcohols or mono- or polyalkylene glycols, (meth)acrylamides, vinylpyrrolidone, or mixtures of these compounds.
  • the preferred polymers of this family are chosen from associative copolymers of AMPS and of at least one ethylenically unsaturated hydrophobic monomer.
  • copolymers may also contain one or more ethylenically unsaturated monomers not including a fatty chain, such as (meth)acrylic acid derivatives, notably esters thereof obtained with monoalcohols or mono- or polyalkylene glycols, (meth)acrylamides, vinylpyrrolidone, or mixtures of these compounds.
  • (meth)acrylic acid derivatives notably esters thereof obtained with monoalcohols or mono- or polyalkylene glycols
  • (meth)acrylamides vinylpyrrolidone, or mixtures of these compounds.
  • - terpolymers including from 10 mol% to 90 mol% of acrylamide units, from 0.1 mol% to 10 mol% of AMPS units and from 5 mol% to 80 mol% of n-(C6- Ci8)alkylacrylamide units, such as those described in patent US-5 089 578.
  • copolymers of totally neutralized AMPS and of dodecyl methacrylate and also crosslinked and non-crosslinked copolymers of AMPS and of n-dodecylmethacrylamide, such as those described in the Morishima articles mentioned above.
  • the non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) are chosen from sodium 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonate/hydroxy ethyl acrylate copolymer, sold by the company SEPPIC (INCI name hydroxy ethyl acrylate/sodium acryloyldimethyl taurate copolymer).
  • the total amount of the non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) ranges from 0.01% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 10% by weight, better still from 0.1% to 5% by weight, and even better still from 0.1% to 2% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition may also comprise at least one silicone.
  • the silicone(s) are different from the compound(s) containing at least one carboxylic acid group as defined hereinbelow.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises at least one silicone chosen from non-amino silicones, amino silicones and mixtures thereof.
  • the silicones may be solid or liquid at 25°C and atmospheric pressure (1.013xl0 5 Pa), and volatile or non-volatile.
  • the silicones that may be used may be soluble or insoluble in the composition according to the invention; they may be in the form of oil, wax, resin or gum; silicone oils are preferred.
  • the hair colouring composition contains one or more silicones that are liquid at 25°C and atmospheric pressure (1.013> ⁇ 10 5 Pa).
  • the volatile silicones may be chosen from those with a boiling point of between 60°C and 260°C (at atmospheric pressure) and more particularly from: i) cyclic polydialkylsiloxanes including from 3 to 7 and preferably 4 to 5 silicon atoms, such as
  • cyclomethylsiloxane Preferably cyclomethylsiloxane.
  • Volatile Silicone FZ 3109 sold by the company Union Carbide.
  • cyclic silicones with silicon-based organic compounds such as the mixture of octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and of tetratrimethylsilylpentaerythritol (50/50) and the mixture of octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and of oxy-1,1’- bis(2,2,2 , ,2 , ,3,3 , -hexatrimethylsilyloxy)neopentane; ii) linear polydialkylsiloxanes containing 2 to 9 silicon atoms, which generally have a viscosity of less than or equal to 5 c 10 6 m 2 /s at 25°C, such as decamethyltetrasiloxane.
  • non-volatile silicones mention may be made, alone or as a mixture, of polydialkylsiloxanes and notably polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS), polydiarylsiloxanes, polyalkylarylsiloxanes, silicone gums and resins, and also organopolysiloxanes (or organomodified polysiloxanes, or alternatively organomodified silicones) which are polysiloxanes including in their structure one or more organofunctional groups, generally attached via a hydrocarbon-based group, and preferably chosen from aryl groups, amine groups, alkoxy groups and polyoxyethylene or polyoxypropylene groups.
  • the non-volatile silicones are chosen from polydimethyl/methylsiloxanes which are optionally oxyethylenated and oxypropylenated.
  • the organomodified silicones may be polydiarylsiloxanes, notably polydiphenylsiloxanes, and polyalkylarylsiloxanes functionalized with the organofunctional groups mentioned previously.
  • the polyalkylarylsiloxanes are particularly chosen from linear and/or branched polydimethyl/methylphenylsiloxanes and polydimethyl/diphenylsiloxanes.
  • organopolysiloxanes including:
  • polyoxyethylene and/or polyoxypropylene groups optionally including C6- C24 alkyl groups, such as dimethicone copolyols, and notably those sold by the company Dow Corning under the name DC 1248 or the oils Silwet® L 722, L 7500, L 77 and L 711 from the company Union Carbide; or alternatively (C12)alkylmethicone copolyols, and notably those sold by the company Dow Corning under the name Q2- 5200;
  • C6- C24 alkyl groups such as dimethicone copolyols, and notably those sold by the company Dow Corning under the name DC 1248 or the oils Silwet® L 722, L 7500, L 77 and L 711 from the company Union Carbide; or alternatively (C12)alkylmethicone copolyols, and notably those sold by the company Dow Corning under the name Q2- 5200;
  • hydroxylated groups for instance polyorganosiloxanes bearing a hydroxyalkyl function
  • the silicones may also be chosen from polydialkylsiloxanes, among which mention may be made mainly of polydimethylsiloxanes bearing trimethyl silyl end groups.
  • polydialkylsiloxanes mention may be made of the following commercial products:
  • oils of the 200 series from the company Dow Corning, such as DC200 with a viscosity of 60 000 mm 2 /s;
  • CTFA dimethiconol
  • CTFA dimethiconol
  • CTFA cyclic polydimethylsiloxane
  • CTFA dimethiconol
  • CTFA dimethicone
  • the polyalkylarylsiloxanes are particularly chosen from linear and/or branched polydimethyl/methylphenylsiloxanes and polydimethyl/diphenylsiloxanes with a viscosity ranging from 1 x 10 5 to 5x 10 2 m 2 /s at 25°C.
  • oils of the SF series from General Electric such as SF 1023, SF 1154, SF 1250 and SF 1265.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises at least one amino silicone.
  • amino silicone denotes any silicone including at least one primary, secondary or tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium group.
  • the weight-average molecular masses of these amino silicones may be measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) at room temperature (25°C), as polystyrene equivalent.
  • the columns used are m styragel columns.
  • the eluent is THF and the flow rate is 1 ml/min. 200 m ⁇ of a 0.5% by weight solution of silicone in THF are injected. Detection is performed by refractometry and UV-metry.
  • the amino silicone(s) that may be used in the context of the invention are chosen from: a) the polysiloxanes corresponding to formula (A): in which x’ and y’ are integers such that the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) is between 5000 and 500 000 approximately; b) the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B): R’aG3-a-Si(0SiG2)n-(0SiGbR’2-b)m-0-SiG3-a-R’a (B) in which:
  • - G which may be identical or different, denotes a hydrogen atom or a group from among phenyl, OH, Ci-Cs alkyl, for example methyl, or C i-Cx alkoxy, for example methoxy,
  • - a which may be identical or different, denotes 0 or an integer from 1 to 3, in particular 0,
  • - b denotes 0 or 1, in particular 1,
  • n + m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10,
  • - R’ which may be identical or different, denotes a monovalent radical of formula -CqH2qL in which q is a number ranging from 2 to 8 and L is an optionally quaternized amine group chosen from the following groups: -N(R”)2; -N+(R”)3 A-; - NR”-Q-N(R”)2 and -NR”-Q-N+(R”)3 A-, in which R”, which may be identical or different, denotes hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl, or a saturated monovalent hydrocarbon- based radical, for example a C1-C20 alkyl radical; Q denotes a linear or branched group of formula CrFEr, r being an integer ranging from 2 to 6, preferably from 2 to 4; and A- represents a cosmetically acceptable anion, notably a halide anion such as fluoride, chloride, bromide or iodide.
  • R which may be identical or different, denotes hydrogen
  • the amino silicone(s) are chosen from the amino silicones of formula (B).
  • the amino silicones of formula (B) are chosen from the amino silicones corresponding to formulae (C), (D), (E), (F) and/or (G) below.
  • the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones known as “trimethyl silyl amodimethicone” corresponding to formula (C): in which m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10.
  • amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (D) below: in which:
  • n + m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 1000, in particular from 50 to 250 and more particularly from 100 to 200; n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 999, notably from 49 to 249 and more particularly from 125 to 175, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 1000, notably from 1 to 10 and more particularly from 1 to 5;
  • Ri, R2 and R3, which may be identical or different, represent a hydroxyl or C1-C4 alkoxy radical, at least one of the radicals Ri to R3 denoting an alkoxy radical.
  • the alkoxy radical is a methoxy radical.
  • the hydroxy/alkoxy mole ratio preferably ranges from 0.2: 1 to 0.4: 1 and preferably from 0.25: 1 to 0.35: 1 and more particularly is equal to 0.3: 1.
  • the weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of these silicones preferably ranges from 2000 to 1 000000 and more particularly from 3500 to 200 000.
  • the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (E) below: in which:
  • - p and q are numbers such that the sum (p + q) ranges from 1 to 1000, in particular from 50 to 350 and more particularly from 150 to 250; p possibly denoting a number from 0 to 999 and notably from 49 to 349 and more particularly from 159 to 239, and q possibly denoting a number from 1 to 1000, notably from 1 to 10 and more particularly from 1 to 5;
  • Ri and R2 which are different, represent a hydroxyl or C1-C4 alkoxy radical, at least one of the radicals Ri or R2 denoting an alkoxy radical.
  • the alkoxy radical is a methoxy radical.
  • the hydroxy/alkoxy mole ratio generally ranges from 1:0.8 to 1:1.1 and preferably from 1:0.9 to 1:1 and more particularly is equal to 1:0.95.
  • the weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of the silicone preferably ranges from 2000 to 200 000, even more particularly from 5000 to 100 000 and more particularly from 10000 to 50000.
  • the commercial products comprising silicones of structure (D) or (E) may include in their composition one or more other amino silicones the structure of which is different from formula (D) or (E).
  • a product containing amino silicones of structure (D) is sold by the company Wacker under the name Belsil® ADM 652.
  • a product containing amino silicones of structure (E) is sold by Wacker under the name Fluid WR 1300® or under the name Belsil® ADM LOG 1.
  • the oil- in-water emulsion may comprise one or more surfactants.
  • the surfactants may be of any nature but are preferably cationic and/or nonionic.
  • the number-average size of the silicone particles in the emulsion generally ranges from 3 nm to 500 nm.
  • use is made of microemulsions with a mean particle size ranging from 5 nm to 60 nm (limits included) and more particularly from 10 nm to 50 nm (limits included).
  • use may be made according to the invention of the amino silicone microemulsions of formula (E) sold under the names Finish CT 96 E® or SLM 28020® by the company Wacker.
  • the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (F) below: in which:
  • n + m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10;
  • A denotes a linear or branched alkylene radical containing from 4 to 8 carbon atoms and preferably 4 carbon atoms. This radical is preferably linear.
  • the weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of these amino silicones preferably ranges from 2000 to 1 000 000 and even more particularly from 3500 to 200 000.
  • Another silicone corresponding to formula (B) is, for example, the Xiameter MEM 8299 Emulsion from Dow Coming (ESICI name: amodimethicone and trideceth- 6 and cetrimonium chloride).
  • the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (G) below: in which:
  • n + m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10;
  • A denotes a linear or branched alkylene radical containing from 4 to 8 carbon atoms and preferably 4 carbon atoms. This radical is preferably branched.
  • the weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of these amino silicones preferably ranges from 500 to 1 000000 and even more particularly from 1000 to 200 000.
  • a silicone corresponding to this formula is, for example, DC2-8566 Amino Fluid from Dow Coming; c) the amino silicones corresponding to formula (H): in which:
  • - R? represents a monovalent hydrocarbon-based radical containing from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and in particular a C I -C IX alkyl or C2-C18 alkenyl radical, for example methyl;
  • - Re represents a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical, notably a C1-C18 alkylene radical or a divalent C1-C18, for example Ci-Cx, alkyleneoxy radical linked to the Si via an SiC bond;
  • - Q is an anion such as a halide ion, notably chloride, or an organic acid salt, notably acetate;
  • - r represents a mean statistical value ranging from 2 to 20 and in particular from 2 to 8;
  • - s represents a mean statistical value ranging from 20 to 200 and in particular from 20 to 50.
  • R.7 which may be identical or different, represent a monovalent hydrocarbon-based radical containing from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and in particular a C1-C18 alkyl radical, a C2-C18 alkenyl radical or a ring comprising 5 or 6 carbon atoms, for example methyl;
  • - R.6 represents a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical, notably a C1-C18 alkylene radical or a divalent C1-C18, for example Ci-Cx, alkyleneoxy radical linked to the Si via an SiC bond;
  • - R.8 which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom, a monovalent hydrocarbon-based radical having from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and in particular a C1-C18 alkyl radical, a C2-C18 alkenyl radical or a radical -R6-NHCOR7;
  • - X is an anion such as a halide ion, notably chloride, or an organic acid salt, notably acetate;
  • - r represents a mean statistical value ranging from 2 to 200 and in particular from 5 to 100.
  • R5 denotes a C1-C4 alkyl radical or a hydroxyl group
  • - n is an integer ranging from 1 to 5
  • - m is an integer ranging from 1 to 5
  • - x is chosen such that the amine number ranges from 0.01 to 1 meq/g; f) multiblock polyoxyalkylene amino silicones, of the type (AB) n , A being a polysiloxane block and B being a polyoxyalkylene block including at least one amine group.
  • Said silicones are preferably formed from repeating units having the following general formulae:
  • - a is an integer greater than or equal to 1, preferably ranging from 5 to 200 and more particularly ranging from 10 to 100;
  • - b is an integer between 0 and 200, preferably ranging from 4 to 100 and more particularly between 5 and 30;
  • - x is an integer ranging from 1 to 10 000 and more particularly from 10 to
  • - R is a hydrogen atom or a methyl
  • R which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched divalent C2-C12 hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally including one or more heteroatoms such as oxygen; preferably, R denotes an ethylene radical, a linear or branched propylene radical, a linear or branched butylene radical or a
  • R denotes a
  • R’ which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched divalent C2-C12 hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally including one or more heteroatoms such as oxygen; preferably, R’ denotes an ethylene radical, a linear or branched propylene radical, a linear or branched butylene radical or a radical CH2CH2CH20CH 2 CH(0H)CH2-; preferentially, R’ denotes -CH(CH 3 )-CH2-.
  • the siloxane blocks preferably represent between 50 mol% and 95 mol% of the total weight of the silicone, more particularly from 70 mol% to 85 mol%.
  • the amine content is preferably between 0.02 and 0.5 meq/g of copolymer in a 30% solution in dipropylene glycol, more particularly between 0.05 and 0.2.
  • the weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of the silicone is preferably between 5000 and 1 000 000 and more particularly between 10 000 and 200 000.
  • the amino silicones of formula (B) are chosen from the amino silicones corresponding to formula (E).
  • the hair colouring composition comprises at least one amino silicone having the INC I name amodimethicone, preferably introduced in the form of an emulsion or microemulsion with surfactants.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises at least one amino silicone having the INCI name amodimethicone as an emulsion or microemulsion with surfactants, having the INCI names trideceth-5 and trideceth-10.
  • the silicone(s) may be present in a total amount ranging from 0.01% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.05% to 15% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 10% by weight and even more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the amino silicone(s) may be present in a total amount ranging from 0.01% to 20%, preferably from 0.05% to 15%, more preferentially from 0.1% to 10% and even more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one associative polymer different from the non-carboxylic anionic thickeners described previously.
  • sociative polymers are polymers that are capable, in an aqueous medium, of reversibly associating with each other or with other molecules.
  • Their chemical structure more particularly comprises at least one hydrophilic zone and at least one hydrophobic zone.
  • hydrophobic group means a radical or polymer with a saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched hydrocarbon-based chain, comprising at least 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, in particular from 12 to 30 carbon atoms and more preferentially from 18 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon-based group is derived from a monofunctional compound.
  • the hydrophobic group may be derived from a fatty alcohol such as stearyl alcohol, dodecyl alcohol or decyl alcohol. It may also denote a hydrocarbon-based polymer, for instance polybutadiene.
  • the associative polymers may be of nonionic, anionic, cationic or amphoteric nature.
  • the associative polymer(s) are chosen from anionic associative polymers.
  • the ones that are particularly preferred according to the invention are polymers formed from 20% to 60% by weight of acrylic acid and/or of methacrylic acid, from 5% to 60% by weight of lower alkyl (meth)acrylates, from 2% to 50% by weight of fatty-chain allyl ether, and from 0 to 1% by weight of a crosslinking agent which is a well-known copolymerizable unsaturated polyethylenic monomer, for instance diallyl phthalate, allyl (meth)acrylate, divinylbenzene, (poly)ethylene glycol dimethacrylate or methyl enebi sacry 1 ami de .
  • a crosslinking agent which is a well-known copolymerizable unsaturated polyethylenic monomer, for instance diallyl phthalate, allyl (meth)acrylate, divinylbenzene, (poly)ethylene glycol dimethacrylate or methyl enebi sacry 1 ami de .
  • crosslinked terpolymers of methacrylic acid, of ethyl acrylate and of polyethylene glycol (10 OE) stearyl alcohol ether (Steareth-10), notably those sold by the company CIBA under the names Salcare SC80® and Salcare SC90®, which are aqueous 30% emulsions of a crosslinked terpolymer of methacrylic acid, of ethyl acrylate and of steareth-10 allyl ether (40/50/10).
  • Alkyl esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids that are useful in the invention comprise, for example, lauryl acrylate, stearyl acrylate, decyl acrylate, isodecyl acrylate and dodecyl acrylate, and the corresponding methacrylates, lauryl methacrylate, stearyl methacrylate, decyl methacrylate, isodecyl methacrylate and dodecyl methacrylate.
  • anionic associative polymers of this type that will be used more particularly are those constituted of from 95% to 60% by weight of acrylic acid (hydrophilic unit), 4% to 40% by weight of C10-C30 alkyl acrylate (hydrophobic unit) and 0 to 6% by weight of crosslinking polymerizable monomer, or alternatively those constituted of from 98% to 96% by weight of acrylic acid (hydrophilic unit), 1% to 4% by weight of C10-C30 alkyl acrylate (hydrophobic unit) and 0.1% to 0.6% by weight of crosslinking polymerizable monomer such as those described previously.
  • the ones most particularly preferred according to the present invention are the products sold by the company Goodrich under the trade names Pemulen TR1®, Pemulen TR2®, Carbopol 1382®, and even more preferentially Pemulen TR1®, and the product sold by the company SEPPIC under the name Coatex SX®.
  • maleic anhydride/C3o-C38 a-olefm/alkyl maleate terpolymers such as the product (maleic anhydride/C3o-C38 a-olefm/isopropyl maleate copolymer) sold under the name Performa V 1608® by the company Newphase Technologies.
  • acrylic terpolymers comprising: i) about 20% to 70% by weight of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid [A], ii) about 20% to 80% by weight of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated non surfactant monomer other than [A], iii) about 0.5% to 60% by weight of a nonionic monourethane which is the product of reaction of a monohydric surfactant with a monoethylenically unsaturated monoisocyanate, such as those described in patent application EP-A-0 173 109 and more particularly the terpolymer described in Example 3, namely a methacrylic aci d/methyl acrylate/behenyl alcohol dimethyl-meta-isopropenylbenzylisocyanate ethoxylated (40 EO) terpolymer, as an aqueous 25% dispersion.
  • a monohydric surfactant with a monoeth
  • these compounds also comprise as monomer an ester of an a,b- monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and of a C1-C4 alcohol.
  • Aculyn 22® sold by the company Rohm & Haas, which is a methacrylic acid/ethyl acrylate/oxyalkylenated stearyl methacrylate terpolymer; and also Aculyn 88, also sold by the company Rohm & Haas.
  • the associative polymer(s) different from the non-carboxylic anionic thickeners are chosen from acrylic associative polymers, more preferentially carboxylic acrylic associative polymers.
  • the associative polymer(s) different from the non- carboxylic anionic thickeners are chosen from copolymers including among their monomers an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and an ester of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and of an oxyalkylenated fatty alcohol.
  • the total amount of the associative polymer(s) ranges from 0.05% to 15% by weight, preferably from 0.05% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 5% by weight and even more preferentially from 0.1% to 1% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one compound, different from the associative polymer(s) as described previously, containing at least one carboxylic acid group.
  • the compound, different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group is chosen from silicone compounds comprising at least one carboxylic group, polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises one or more compounds, different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
  • the compound(s), different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group are in the form of aqueous dispersions of particles of polymer(s) chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises one or more compounds, different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group in the form of aqueous dispersions of particles of polymer(s) chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
  • the polymer(s) used in the aqueous dispersions of polymer particles are different from the associative polymers.
  • the dispersion(s) may be simple dispersions in the aqueous medium of the cosmetic composition.
  • dispersions mention may be made of latexes.
  • the aqueous dispersion(s) of polymer particles may be chosen from aqueous dispersions of polyurethane particles.
  • polyurethane(s) present in the aqueous dispersions used in the present invention result from the reaction of:
  • - Ri represents a divalent radical of a dihydroxylated compound
  • - R2 represents a radical of an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic polyisocyanate
  • R3 represents a radical of a low molecular weight diol, optionally substituted with one or more ionic groups
  • - n represents an integer ranging from 1 to 5
  • R4 represents an alkylene or alkylene oxide radical which is not substituted with one or more ionic or potentially ionic groups; and - at least one chain extender according to formula (C) below:
  • R5 represents an alkylene radical substituted with one or more ionic or potentially ionic groups.
  • dihydroxylated compounds of high molecular weight mention may be made of polyol polyesters, polyol polyethers, polyhydroxylated polycarbonates, polyhydroxylated polyacetates, polyhydroxylated polyacrylates, polyhydroxylated amide polyesters, polyhydroxylated polyalkadienes, polyhydroxylated polythioethers, and mixtures thereof.
  • the hydroxylated compounds are chosen from polyol polyesters, polyol polyethers, polyhydroxylated polycarbonates, and mixtures thereof.
  • the polyisocyanates that may be used according to the present invention are notably chosen from organic diisocyanates with a molecular weight of about 112 to 1000, and preferably about 140 to 400.
  • the polyisocyanates are chosen from diisocyanates and more particularly from those represented by the general formula R2(NCO)2, in which R2 represents a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 4 to 18 carbon atoms, a divalent cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 5 to 15 carbon atoms, a divalent araliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 7 to 15 carbon atoms or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 6 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • R2 represents a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 4 to 18 carbon atoms, a divalent cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 5 to 15 carbon atoms, a divalent araliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 7 to 15 carbon atoms or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 6 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • R2 represents an organic diisocyanate.
  • organic diisocyanates the following may notably be chosen: tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,6- hexamethylene diisocyanate, dodecamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3- diisocyanatocyclohexane, 1,4-diisocyanatocyclohexane, 3-isocyanatomethyl-3,5,5- trimethylcyclohexane isocyanate (isophorone diisocyanate or IPDI), bis(4- isocyanatocyclohexyl)methane, l,3-bis(isocyanatomethyl)cyclohexane, 1,4- bis(isocyanatomethyl)cyclohexane, bis(4-isocyanato-3-methyl-cyclohexyl)methane, isomers of toluene diisocyanate (TDI) such as toluene 2,4-di
  • the diisocyanates are aliphatic and cycloaliphatic diisocyanates, and are more preferentially chosen from 1,6-hexam ethylene diisocyanate, 3- isocyanatomethyl-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexane isocyanate, and mixtures thereof.
  • low molecular weight diol refers to a diol with a molecular weight from about 62 to 700, and preferably from 62 to 200.
  • These diols may comprise aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic groups. Preferably, they comprise only aliphatic groups.
  • R.3 represents a low molecular weight diol containing more than 20 carbon atoms, more preferentially chosen from ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,3-butylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, butylethylpropanediol, cyclohexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, 1,6- hexanediol, bisphenol A (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane), hydrogenated bisphenol A (2,2-bis(4-hydroxycyclohexyl)propane), and mixtures thereof.
  • the low molecular weight diols may optionally comprise ionic or potentially ionic groups.
  • Examples of low molecular weight diols containing ionic or potentially ionic groups are notably described in patent US 3 412 054.
  • Such compounds are preferably chosen from dimethylolbutanoic acid, dimethylolpropionic acid, polycaprolactone diols containing a carboxyl group, and mixtures thereof.
  • low molecular weight diols containing ionic or potentially ionic groups are used, they are preferably used in an amount such that less than 0.30 meq of COOH per gram of polyurethane is present in the polyurethane dispersion.
  • the prepolymer is extended by means of two families of chain extenders.
  • the first family of chain extenders corresponds to the compounds of general formula (B).
  • the chain extenders of formula (B) are preferably chosen from alkylenediamines, such as hydrazine, ethylenediamine, propylenediamine, 1,4- butylenediamine, piperazine; alkylene oxide diamines, such as 3- ⁇ 2-[2-(3- aminopropoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy ⁇ propylamine (also known as dipropylamine diethylene glycol or DPA-DEG available from Tomah Products, Milton, Wis.), 2-methyl-l,5- pentanediamine (Dytec A from DuPont), hexanediamine, isophorone diamine, 4,4- methylenedi(cyclohexylamine), ether-amines of the DPA series, available from Tomah Products, Milton, Wis., such as dipropylamine propylene glycol, dipropylamine dipropylene glycol, dipropylamine tripropylene glycol, dipropylamine polypropylene glycol), dipropylamine
  • the second family of chain extenders corresponds to the compounds of general formula (C).
  • Such compounds preferably have an ionic or potentially ionic group and two groups that can react with isocyanate groups.
  • Such compounds may optionally comprise two groups that react with isocyanate groups and one group which is ionic or capable of forming an ionic group.
  • the ionic or potentially ionic group may preferably be chosen from ternary or quaternary ammonium groups or groups that can be converted into such groups, a carboxyl group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonic acid group and a sulfonate group.
  • the at least partial conversion of groups that can be converted into a ternary or quaternary ammonium group salt may be performed before or during the mixing with water.
  • the chain extenders of formula (C) are preferably chosen from diaminosulfonates, for instance the sodium salt of N-(2-aminoethyl)-2- aminoethanesulfonic acid (ASA), the sodium salt of N-(2-aminoethyl)-2- aminopropionic acid, and mixtures thereof.
  • ASA N-(2-aminoethyl)-2- aminoethanesulfonic acid
  • the polyurethane that may be used according to the present invention may optionally also comprise compounds which are located, respectively, at the chain ends and terminate said chains (chain terminators). Such compounds are notably described in patents US 7 445 770 and/or US 7452 770.
  • the aqueous dispersion of polyurethane particles has a viscosity of less than 2000 mPa.s at 23°C, more preferentially less than 1500, and even better still less than 1000. Even more preferably, the aqueous polyurethane dispersion has a glass transition temperature of less than 0°C.
  • the aqueous polyurethane dispersion has a polyurethane (or active material, or solids) content, on the basis of the weight of the dispersion, of from 20% to 60% by weight, more preferentially from 25% to 55% by weight and even better still from 30% to 50% by weight.
  • a polyurethane content (solids) of the aqueous dispersion is preferably from 20% to 60% by weight, more preferentially from 25% to 55% by weight and better still from 30% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the dispersion.
  • the aqueous dispersion of polyurethane particles has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of less than or equal to -25°C, preferably less than -35°C and more preferentially less than -40°C.
  • Tg glass transition temperature
  • the polyurethane particles may have a mean diameter ranging up to about 1000 nm, for example from about 50 nm to about 800 nm, better still from about 100 nm to about 500 nm. These particle sizes may be measured with a laser particle size analyzer (for example Brookhaven BI90).
  • Baycusan® As non-limiting examples of aqueous polyurethane dispersions, mention may be made of those sold under the name Baycusan® by Bayer, for instance Baycusan® C1000 (INCI name: polyurethane-34), Baycusan® ClOOl (INCI name: polyurethane- 34), Baycusan® Cl 003 (INCI name: polyurethane-32), Baycusan® Cl 004 (INCI name: polyurethane-35) and Baycusan® Cl 008 (INCI name: polyurethane-48).
  • Baycusan® C1000 INCI name: polyurethane-34
  • Baycusan® ClOOl INCI name: polyurethane- 34
  • Baycusan® Cl 003 INCI name: polyurethane-32
  • Baycusan® Cl 004 INCI name: polyurethane-35
  • Baycusan® Cl 008 INCI name: polyurethane-48.
  • aqueous polyurethane dispersions of isophthalic acid/adipic acid copolymer/hexylene glycol/neopentyl glycol/dimethylol acid/isophorone diisocyanate (INCI name: Polyurethane- 1, such as Luviset® PUR, BASF), the polyurethane of polycarbonate, polyurethane and aliphatic polyurethane of aliphatic polyester (such as the Neorez® series, DSM, such as Neorez® R989, Neorez® and R-2202).
  • the aqueous dispersion of polyurethane particles may be chosen from aqueous dispersions of particles of compounds having the INCI name polyurethane-35 or compounds having the INCI name polyurethane- 34.
  • the compound(s), different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group are in the form of aqueous dispersions of particles of acrylic polymers, more preferentially in the form of aqueous dispersions of film-forming acrylic polymer particles.
  • polymer means a compound corresponding to the repetition of one or more units (these units being derived from compounds known as monomers). This or these unit(s) are repeated at least twice and preferably at least three times.
  • film- forming polymer refers to a polymer that is capable of forming, by itself or in the presence of an auxiliary film-forming agent, a macroscopically continuous film on a support, notably on keratinous materials, and preferably a cohesive film.
  • acrylic polymer means a polymer synthesized from at least one monomer chosen from (meth)acrylic acid and/or (meth)acrylic acid ester and/or (meth)acrylic acid amide.
  • the unit(s) derived from the (meth)acrylic acid monomers of the polymer may optionally be in the form of salt(s), notably of alkali metal, alkaline-earth metal or ammonium salt(s), or organic base salt(s).
  • the (meth)acrylic acid esters are advantageously chosen from alkyl (meth)acrylates, in particular Ci to C30, preferably Ci to C20 and better still Ci to C10 alkyl (meth)acrylates, aryl (meth)acrylates, in particular G to C10 aryl (meth)acrylates, and hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates, in particular C2 to G, hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylates that may be mentioned are methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, 2- ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, lauryl (meth)acrylate and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
  • hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates that may be mentioned are hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate and 2- hydroxypropyl methacrylate.
  • aryl (meth)acrylates that may be mentioned are benzyl acrylate and phenyl acrylate.
  • the (meth)acrylic acid esters that are particularly preferred are alkyl (meth)acrylates, preferably Ci to C30, more preferentially Ci to C20, better still Ci to C10, and even more particularly Ci to C4 alkyl (meth)acrylates.
  • the alkyl group of the esters may be fluorinated, or even perfluorinated, i.e. some or all of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group are substituted with fluorine atoms.
  • (meth)acrylic acid amides examples that may be mentioned include (meth)acrylamides and also N-alkyl(meth)acrylamides, in particular N-(C2 to C12 alkyl)(meth)acrylamides.
  • N-alkyl(meth)acrylamides examples that may be mentioned are N-ethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, N-t-octyl acrylamide and N- undecyl aery 1 ami de .
  • the acrylic polymer according to the invention may be a homopolymer or a copolymer, advantageously a copolymer, better still a copolymer of (meth)acrylic acid and of (meth)acrylic acid esters.
  • the acrylic polymer(s) according to the invention comprise one or more units derived from the following monomers: a) (meth)acrylic acid; and b) Ci to C30, more preferentially Ci to C20, better still Ci to C10, and even more particularly Ci to C4, alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles does not comprise any surfactant.
  • surfactant refers to any agent that is capable of modifying the surface tension between two surfaces.
  • acrylic polymers according to the invention, mention may be made of copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid and of methyl or ethyl (meth)acrylate, in particular copolymers of methacrylic acid and of ethyl acrylate such as the compound sold under the trade name Luvimer MAE by the company BASF, or the compound Polyacrylate- 2 Crosspolymer sold under the trade name Fixate Superhold Polymer by the company Lubrizol, or the compound Acrylate Copolymer sold under the trade name Daitosol 3000VP3 by the company Daito Kasei Kogyo, or the compound Acrylate Polymer sold under the trade name Daitosol 3000 SLPN-PE1 by the company Daito Kasei Kogyo.
  • copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid and of methyl or ethyl (meth)acrylate such as the compound sold under the trade name Luvimer MAE by the company BASF, or the compound Polyacrylate- 2 Crosspolymer sold under
  • the acrylic polymer may optionally comprise one or more additional monomers, other than the (meth)acrylic acid and/or (meth)acrylic acid ester and/or (meth)acrylic acid amide monomers.
  • styrene monomers in particular styrene and a-methyl styrene, and preferably styrene.
  • the acrylic polymer may be a styrene/(meth)acrylate copolymer and notably a polymer chosen from copolymers resulting from the polymerization of at least one styrene monomer and at least one Ci to C20, preferably Ci to C10, alkyl (meth)acrylate monomer.
  • the Ci to C10 alkyl (meth)acrylate monomer may be chosen from methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, butyl acrylate, hexyl acrylate, octyl acrylate and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate.
  • acrylic polymer mention may be made of the styrene/(meth)acrylate copolymers sold under the name Joncryl 77 by the company BASF, under the name Yodosol GH41F by the company Akzo Nobel and under the name Syntran 5760 CG by the company Interpolymer.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises at least one aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles.
  • the hair colouring composition comprises at least one aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles comprising one or more units derived from the following monomers: a) (meth)acrylic acid; and b) Ci to C30, more preferentially Ci to C20, better still Ci to C10, and even more particularly Ci to C4, alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles has an acrylic polymer (or active material, or solids) content, on the basis of the weight of the dispersion, of from 20% to 60% by weight, more preferentially from 22% to 55% by weight and better still from 25% to 50% by weight.
  • the total amount of the compound(s), different from the associative polymer(s), containing at least one carboxylic acid group preferably ranges from 0.1% to 35% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 30% by weight, better still from 1% to 25% by weight, and even more preferentially from 3% to 25% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the total amount of the aqueous dispersion(s) of polymer particles preferably ranges from 0.1% to 35% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 30% by weight, better still from 1% to 25% by weight, and even more preferentially from 3% to 25% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the total amount of the aqueous dispersion(s) of acrylic polymer particles, different from the associative polymer(s) as described previously, preferably ranges from 0.1% to 35% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 30% by weight, better still from 1% to 25% by weight, and even more preferentially from 3% to 25% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may comprise one or more organic solvents.
  • organic solvents examples include lower C1-C4 alkanols, such as ethanol and isopropanol; polyols and polyol ethers, for instance 2- butoxyethanol, propylene glycol, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether and monomethyl ether, and also aromatic alcohols, for instance benzyl alcohol or phenoxyethanol, and mixtures thereof.
  • lower C1-C4 alkanols such as ethanol and isopropanol
  • polyols and polyol ethers for instance 2- butoxyethanol, propylene glycol, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether and monomethyl ether
  • aromatic alcohols for instance benzyl alcohol or phenoxyethanol
  • the hair colouring composition comprises one or more organic solvents chosen from C1-C4 lower alkanols, more preferentially ethanol.
  • the organic solvents may be present in a total amount inclusively between 0.01% and 60% by weight approximately relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition, preferably between 0.05% and 50% by weight and more preferentially inclusively between 0.1% and 45% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention is preferably aqueous.
  • the water content may range from 20% to 99% by weight, preferably from 50% to 98% by weight and more preferentially from 60% to 95% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
  • the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may contain any adjuvant or additive usually used.
  • the hair colouring composition may notably be in the form of a suspension, a dispersion, a gel, an emulsion, notably an oil-in-water (O/W) or water-in-oil (W/O) emulsion, or a multiple emulsion (W/O/W or polyol/O/W or O/W/O), in the form of a cream, a mousse, a stick, a dispersion of vesicles, notably of ionic or nonionic lipids, or a two-phase or multi-phase lotion.
  • a person skilled in the art may select the appropriate presentation form, and also the method for preparing it, on the basis of his general knowledge, taking into account firstly the nature of the constituents used, notably their solubility in the support, and secondly the intended application of the composition.
  • composition D may also comprise a step of applying to the hair keratin fibers a composition D comprising at least one silicone compound comprising at least one carboxylic group, the application of said composition D taking place before the application of the colour-removing composition.
  • carboxylic group means a COOH or COO functional group, the counterion of the COO group possibly being chosen from alkali metals, alkaline-earth metals and quaternary ammoniums.
  • the silicones that may be used may be soluble or insoluble in composition D; they may be in the form of oil, wax, resin or gum; silicone oils and gums are preferred.
  • the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group are chosen from the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVII) below:
  • R1 independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; a hydroxyl group; an alkoxy group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms;
  • R2 independently represents a group R4-COOM with R4 representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof, and M representing a hydrogen atom; an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; a pyrrolidine radical comprising a carboxylic group COOH or a group Ra-(ORb)x-COOM with Ra representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Rb representing an alkyl group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200; and M representing a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth
  • R3 independently represent an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; a hydroxyl group; a group R4-COOM with R4 representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof, and M representing a hydrogen atom; an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; an alkoxy group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; an aryl group containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms or a group R a -(OR b )x-COOM with R a representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R b representing an alkyl
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • radicals R2 and/or R3 comprises a carboxylic group COOH or COOM with M representing an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group may be chosen from the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVIII) below:
  • R1 independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and better still from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferentially methyl;
  • R4 independently represents a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof; or a divalent group Ra-(ORb)x- with R a representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, 3 ⁇ 4, representing an alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200;
  • - M independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • R1 independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferentially a methyl;
  • R4 represents a linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof; or a divalent group Ra-(ORb)x- with R a representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R b representing an alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200;
  • - M represents a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
  • - p denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • R1 independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and better still from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferentially methyl;
  • R4 represents a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof; or a divalent group Ra-(ORb)x- with R a representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R b representing an alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200;
  • R3 represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms;
  • - M independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • R8 represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably a methyl
  • - m denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • organosiloxanes of formula (XXVIII) mention may be made of polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS) bearing a carboxyl end function, such as the compounds sold by the company Momentive under the trade name Silform INX (INCI name: Bis-Carboxydecyl Dimethicone).
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxanes bearing a carboxyl end function
  • organosiloxanes of formula (XXIX) mention may be made of polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS) bearing a carboxyl side function, such as the compounds sold by the company Shin-Etsu under the trade name X-22-3701E.
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxanes bearing a carboxyl side function
  • organosiloxanes of formula (XXX) mention may be made of polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS) bearing a carboxyl end function, such as the compounds sold by the company Shin-Etsu under the trade name X-22-3710.
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxanes bearing a carboxyl end function
  • organosiloxanes of formula (XXXI) mention may be made of the compounds sold by the company Grant Industries under the trade name Grandsil SiW- PCA-10 (INCI name: Dimethicone (and) PCA Dimethicone (and) Butylene Glycol (and) Decyl Glucoside).
  • the silicone compounds comprising a carboxylic group may correspond, for example, to the compounds described in the patent application EP 186 507 in the name of Chisso Corporation, introduced herein by reference.
  • the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group are chosen from the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVIII), the organopolysiloxanes of formula (XXIX) and mixtures thereof.
  • silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group are chosen from the organopolysiloxanes of formula (XXIXa) below:
  • R4 represents a linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof, or even from 8 to 12 carbon atoms;
  • - p denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
  • - n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000.
  • the total amount of the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group, present in composition D preferably ranges from 0.01% to 20% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 15% by weight and better still from 0.5% to 10% by weight relative to the total weight of composition D.
  • Composition D may comprise one or more oils.
  • composition D comprises one or more oils. More preferentially, composition D comprises one or more oils chosen from alkanes.
  • the term “oz” means a fatty substance that is liquid at room temperature (25°C) and at atmospheric pressure (760 mmHg or 1.013 x 10 5 Pa).
  • the oil may be volatile or non-volatile.
  • volatile oil refers to an oil that can evaporate on contact with the skin in less than one hour, at room temperature and atmospheric pressure.
  • the volatile oil is a cosmetic volatile oil, which is liquid at room temperature. More specifically, a volatile oil has an evaporation rate of between 0.01 and 200 mg/cm 2 /min, limits included (see protocol for measuring the evaporation rate indicated in the text below).
  • non-volatile oil refers to an oil that remains on the skin or the hair keratin fiber at room temperature and atmospheric pressure. More specifically, a non volatile oil has an evaporation rate of strictly less than 0.01 mg/cm 2 /min (see protocol for measuring the evaporation rate indicated in the text below).
  • the composition comprises one or more oils chosen from C6-Ci6 alkanes and/or mixtures thereof.
  • C6-C16 alkanes they may be linear or branched, and possibly cyclic.
  • Cs-Ci6 alkanes such as Cs-Ci6 isoalkanes (also known as isoparaffins), isododecane, isodecane or isohexadecane, and for example the oils sold under the Isopar or Permethyl trade names, and mixtures thereof.
  • linear alkanes preferably of plant origin, comprising from 7 to 15 carbon atoms, in particular from 9 to 14 carbon atoms and more particularly from 11 to 13 carbon atoms.
  • linear alkanes that are suitable for use in the invention, mention may be made of n-heptane (C7), n-octane (C8), n-nonane (C9), n-decane (CIO), n-undecane (Cl l), n-dodecane (C12), n-tridecane (C13), n-tetradecane (C14) and n-pentadecane (Cl 5), and mixtures thereof, and in particular the mixture of n- undecane (Cl l) and n-tridecane (C13) described in Example 1 of patent application WO 2008/155 059 by the company Cognis.
  • alkanes that are suitable for use in the invention, mention may be made of the alkanes described in patent applications WO 2007/068 371 and WO 2008/155 059. These alkanes are obtained from fatty alcohols, which are themselves obtained from coconut kernel oil or palm oil.
  • the composition comprises isododecane.
  • Such a compound is, for example, the isododecane sold under the reference Isododecane by Ineos.
  • composition D comprises one or more oils chosen from Cs-Ci6 alkanes, more preferentially from isododecane, isohexadecane, tetradecane and/or mixtures thereof.
  • composition D comprises isododecane.
  • Composition D may comprise one or more oils present in a total amount of between 30% and 99% by weight, preferably between 50% and 99% by weight and better still between 70% and 99% by weight, relative to the total weight of composition D.
  • Composition D may comprise at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof as described previously.
  • the process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers comprises the application of at least one colour- removing composition to said hair keratin fibers, which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition as defined above, said colour-removing composition comprising at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant, and at least one polyol.
  • the hair colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one surfactant.
  • the surfactant is a cationic surfactant.
  • cationic surfactant means a surfactant that is positively charged when it is contained in the colour-removing composition. This surfactant may bear one or more positive permanent charges or may contain one or more cationizable functions in the composition according to the invention.
  • the cationic surfactant(s) may be chosen from primary, secondary or tertiary fatty amines, which are optionally polyoxyalkylenated, or salts thereof, quaternary ammonium salts, and mixtures thereof.
  • the cationic surfactant(s) are preferably chosen from quaternary ammonium salts.
  • the faty amines generally comprise at least one C8-C30 hydrocarbon-based chain.
  • the cationic surfactant(s) are chosen from: - those corresponding to formula (XXXII) below:
  • the groups Ri to R4 which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched aliphatic group including from 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aromatic group such as aryl or alkylaryl, at least one of the groups Ri to R4 denoting a linear or branched aliphatic radical including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, preferably from 12 to 24 carbon atoms,
  • - X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, phosphates, acetates, lactates, (Ci- C4)alkyl sulfates, (Ci-C4)alkylsulfonates or (Ci-C4)alkylarylsulfonates,
  • quaternary ammonium salts of formula (XXXII) are, on the one hand, tetraalkylammonium salts, for instance dialkyldimethylammonium or alkyltrimethylammonium salts in which the alkyl group comprises from about 12 to 22 carbon atoms, in particular behenyltrimethylammonium, distearyldimethylammonium, cetyltrimethylammonium or benzyldimethylstearylammonium salts, or, on the other hand, the palmitylamidopropyltrimethylammonium salts, the stearamidopropyltrimethylammonium salts, the stearamidopropyldimethylcetearylammonium salts, or the stearamidopropyldimethyl(myristyl acetate)ammonium salts sold under the name Ceraphyl® 70 by the company Van Dyk. It is preferred in particular to use the chloride salts of
  • R5 represents an alkenyl or alkyl group including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, for example derived from tallow fatty acids,
  • R6 represents a hydrogen atom, a C1-C4 alkyl group or an alkenyl or alkyl group including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms,
  • R7 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group
  • R8 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group
  • - X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, phosphates, acetates, lactates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfonates or alkylarylsulfonates in which the alkyl and aryl groups preferably comprise, respectively, from 1 to 20 carbon atoms and from 6 to 30 carbon atoms,
  • Rs and R. 6 denote a mixture of alkenyl or alkyl groups including from 12 to 21 carbon atoms, for example derived from tallow fatty acids, R denotes a methyl group and Rx denotes a hydrogen atom.
  • R denotes a methyl group
  • Rx denotes a hydrogen atom.
  • R9 denotes an alkyl radical including from about 16 to 30 carbon atoms, which is optionally hydroxylated and/or optionally interrupted with one or more oxygen atoms,
  • - Rio is chosen from hydrogen or an alkyl radical including from 1 to 4 carbon atoms Or a group (R9a)(Rl0a)(Rlla)N-(CH2)3,
  • R9a, Rioa, Riia, Rii, Ri2, Ri3 and Ri4, which may be identical or different, are chosen from hydrogen or an alkyl radical including from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
  • - X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, acetates, phosphates, nitrates, (Ci- C4)alkyl sulfates, (Ci-C4)alkylsulfonates and (Ci-C4)alkylarylsulfonates, in particular methyl sulfate and ethyl sulfate,
  • Such compounds are, for example, Finquat CT-P, sold by the company Finetex (Quaternium 89), and Finquat CT, sold by the company Finetex (Quaternium 75); - quaternary ammonium salts containing at least one ester function, such as those of formula (XXXV) below: in which:
  • Ri5 is chosen from C1-C 6 alkyl groups and C1-C 6 hydroxyalkyl or dihydroxyalkyl groups,
  • Ri 6 is chosen from: the group the groups R20, which are linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-C22 hydrocarbon-based groups, a hydrogen atom,
  • R1 8 is chosen from: the group the groups R22, which are linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-C 6 hydrocarbon-based groups, a hydrogen atom,
  • Ri7, Ri9 and R21 which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C7-C21 hydrocarbon-based groups;
  • - r, s and t which may be identical or different, are integers ranging from 2 to 6;
  • - y is an integer ranging from 1 to 10;
  • - x and z which may be identical or different, are integers ranging from 0 to 10;
  • - X is a simple or complex, organic or mineral anion; with the proviso that the sum x + y + z is from 1 to 15, that when x is 0 then Ri6 denotes R20, and that when z is 0 then Ris denotes R22.
  • the alkyl groups R15 may be linear or branched, and more particularly linear.
  • R15 denotes a methyl, ethyl, hydroxyethyl or dihydroxypropyl group, and more particularly a methyl or ethyl group.
  • the sum x + y + z is from 1 to 10.
  • Ri 6 is a hydrocarbon-based group R20, it may be long and contain from 12 to 22 carbon atoms, or short and contain from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • R18 is a hydrocarbon-based group R22, it preferably contains 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • Rn, R19 and R21 which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C11-C21 hydrocarbon-based groups, and more particularly from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C11- C21 alkyl and alkenyl groups.
  • x and z which may be identical or different, are equal to 0 or 1.
  • y is equal to 1.
  • r, s and t which may be identical or different, are equal to 2 or 3, and even more particularly are equal to 2.
  • the anion X is preferably a halide (chloride, bromide or iodide) or an alkyl sulfate, more particularly methyl sulfate.
  • halide chloride, bromide or iodide
  • alkyl sulfate more particularly methyl sulfate.
  • methanesulfonate, phosphate, nitrate, tosylate an anion derived from an organic acid, such as acetate or lactate, or any other anion that is compatible with the ammonium bearing an ester function.
  • the anion X is even more particularly chloride or methyl sulfate.
  • Ri5 denotes a methyl or ethyl group, x and y are equal to 1 ; z is equal to 0 or 1; r, s and t are equal to 2;
  • R16 is chosen from:
  • R18 is chosen from:
  • Ri7, Ri9 and R21 which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C13-C17 hydrocarbon-based groups, and preferably from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C13-C17 alkyl and alkenyl groups.
  • the hydrocarbon-based groups are linear.
  • acyl groups preferably contain 14 to 18 carbon atoms and are more particularly derived from a plant oil such as palm oil or sunflower oil. When the compound contains several acyl groups, these groups may be identical or different.
  • These products are obtained, for example, by direct esterification of triethanolamine, triisopropanolamine, an alkyldiethanolamine or an alkyldiisopropanolamine, which are optionally oxyalkylenated, with C10-C30 fatty acids or with mixtures of C10-C30 fatty acids of plant or animal origin, or by transesterification of the methyl esters thereof.
  • This esterification is followed by a quaternization using an alkylating agent such as an alkyl halide (preferably a methyl or ethyl halide), a dialkyl sulfate (preferably a methyl or ethyl sulfate), methyl methanesulfonate, methyl para-toluenesulfonate, glycol chlorohydrin or glycerol chlorohydrin.
  • an alkylating agent such as an alkyl halide (preferably a methyl or ethyl halide), a dialkyl sulfate (preferably a methyl or ethyl sulfate), methyl methanesulfonate, methyl para-toluenesulfonate, glycol chlorohydrin or glycerol chlorohydrin.
  • Such compounds are sold, for example, under the names Dehyquart® by the company Henkel, Stepanquat® by the company Stepan, Noxamium® by the company CECA or Rewoquat® WE 18 by the company Rewo-Witco.
  • composition according to the invention may contain, for example, a mixture of quaternary ammonium monoester, diester and triester salts with a weight majority of diester salts.
  • Else may also be made of the ammonium salts containing at least one ester function that are described in patents E1S-A-4 874 554 and E1S-A-4 137 180.
  • Use may be made of behenoylhydroxypropyltrimethylammonium chloride sold by KAO under the name Quatarmin BTC 131.
  • the ammonium salts containing at least one ester function contain two ester functions.
  • the quaternary ammonium salts containing at least one ester function which may be used, it is preferred to use dipalmitoylethylhydroxyethylmethyl- ammonium salts.
  • the cationic surfactant(s) are preferably chosen from those of formula (XXXII) and those of formula (XXXV) and even more preferentially from those of formula (XXXII).
  • the cationic surfactant(s) are chosen from those of formula (XXXII), more preferentially from behenyltrimethylammonium salts, cetyltrimethylammonium salts, and a mixture thereof, and even more preferentially from behenyltrimethylammonium chloride, cetyltrimethylammonium chloride, and a mixture thereof.
  • the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants are present in a total content ranging from 0.05% to 15% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight, and better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants are present in a total content of greater than or equal to 0.5% by weight, preferably ranging from 0.5% to 5% by weight, better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one polyol.
  • polyol means an organic compound constituted of a hydrocarbon-based chain optionally interrupted with one or more oxygen atoms and bearing at least two free hydroxyl groups (-OH) borne by different carbon atoms, this compound possibly being cyclic or acyclic, linear or branched, and saturated or unsaturated.
  • the polyol(s) comprise from 2 to 30 hydroxyl groups, more preferentially from 2 to 10 hydroxyl groups, more preferentially still from 2 to 3 hydroxyl groups.
  • the colour-removing composition comprises one or more polyols chosen from diglycerol, glycerol, propylene glycol, propane-1, 3-diol, 1,3-butylene glycol, pentane- 1,2-diol, octane- 1,2-diol, dipropylene glycol, hexylene glycol, ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, sorbitol, sugars, such as glucose, and mixtures thereof, preferably from propylene glycol.
  • polyols chosen from diglycerol, glycerol, propylene glycol, propane-1, 3-diol, 1,3-butylene glycol, pentane- 1,2-diol, octane- 1,2-diol, dipropylene glycol, hexylene glycol, ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, sorbitol, sugars, such as glucose, and mixtures thereof, preferably from propylene glycol.
  • the polyol(s) are present in a total content of at least 35% by weight, preferably ranging from 35% to 95% by weight, more preferentially from 35% to 85% by weight, and even more preferentially from 35% to 70% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one alkyl or alkylene carbonate.
  • alkyl carbonate means an alkyl or dialkyl carbonate.
  • the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is a C1-C30, preferably C1-C6, alkyl or C1-C30, preferably C1-C6, alkylene carbonate; more preferentially, the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is chosen from alkylene carbonates, better still from propylene carbonate, butylene carbonate, pentylene carbonate and mixtures thereof.
  • the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is chosen from propylene carbonate.
  • the content of alkyl or alkylene carbonate ranges from 10% to 60% by weight, preferably from 15% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one glycol ether different from the polyols described previously.
  • the glycol ether is chosen from those of formula RII(-0-CH(CH3)- CH 2 )nOH, in which R11 denotes a C1-C30, preferably C1-C6 and more preferentially Ci- C4 alkyl radical, and in which n is from 1 to 50, preferably from 2 to 50, more preferably from 2 to 10, preferentially 2 to 5.
  • the glycol ether is of formula CH3(-0-CH(CH3)-CH2)n0H, in which n is from 2 to 50, preferably from 2 to 10, more preferentially from 2 to 5.
  • the glycol ether is chosen from tripropylene glycol methyl ether, tripropylene glycol ethyl ether, tripropylene glycol propyl ether, tripropylene glycol butyl ether and mixtures thereof, preferably tripropylene glycol methyl ether.
  • the total content of glycol ether(s), when they are present, preferably ranges from 5% to 30% by weight, preferably from 5% to 15% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one fatty substance.
  • Said fatty substances may be liquid fatty substances (or oils) and/or solid fatty substances.
  • liquid fatty substance means a fatty substance having a melting point of less than or equal to 25°C at atmospheric pressure (1.013xl0 5 Pa).
  • solid fatty substance means a fatty substance having a melting point of greater than 25°C at atmospheric pressure (1.013> ⁇ 10 5 Pa).
  • the melting point corresponds to the temperature of the most endothermic peak observed on thermal analysis (differential scanning calorimetry or DSC) as described in the standard ISO 11357-3; 1999.
  • the melting point may be measured using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), for example the calorimeter sold under the name MDSC 2920 by the company TA Instruments.
  • DSC differential scanning calorimeter
  • all the melting points are determined at atmospheric pressure (1.013xl0 5 Pa).
  • fatty substance means an organic compound that is insoluble in water at 25°C and at atmospheric pressure (1.013xl0 5 Pa) (solubility of less than 5% by weight, preferably less than 1% by weight and even more preferentially less than 0.1% by weight). They bear in their structure at least one hydrocarbon-based chain including at least 6 carbon atoms and/or a sequence of at least two siloxane groups.
  • the fatty substances are generally soluble in organic solvents under the same temperature and pressure conditions, for instance chloroform, dichloromethane, carbon tetrachloride, ethanol, benzene, toluene, tetrahydrofuran (THF), liquid petroleum jelly or decamethylcyclopentasiloxane.
  • the fatty substances that may be used in the present invention are neither (poly)oxyalkylenated nor (poly)glycerolated.
  • useful fatty substances according to the invention are non-silicone.
  • non-silicone fatty substance refers to a fatty substance not containing any Si-0 bonds and the term “silicone fatty substance” refers to a fatty substance containing at least one Si-0 bond.
  • the liquid fatty substance(s) according to the invention are chosen from G to Ci 6 liquid hydrocarbons, liquid hydrocarbons comprising more than 16 carbon atoms, nonsilicone oils of animal origin, oils of triglyceride type of plant or synthetic origin, fluoro oils, liquid fatty alcohols, liquid fatty acid and/or fatty alcohol esters other than triglycerides, and silicone oils, and mixtures thereof.
  • the fatty alcohols, esters and acids more particularly contain at least one saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched hydrocarbon-based group, comprising 6 to 40 and better still from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted, in particular, with one or more hydroxyl groups (in particular 1 to 4). If they are unsaturated, these compounds may comprise one to three conjugated or unconjugated carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • Ci 6 liquid hydrocarbons may be linear, branched, or optionally cyclic, and are preferably chosen from alkanes. Examples that may be mentioned include hexane, cyclohexane, undecane, dodecane, isododecane, tridecane or isoparaffins, such as isohexadecane or isodecane, and mixtures thereof.
  • the liquid hydrocarbons comprising more than 16 carbon atoms may be linear or branched, and of mineral or synthetic origin, and are preferably chosen from liquid paraffins or liquid petroleum jelly, polydecenes, hydrogenated polyisobutene such as Parleam®, and mixtures thereof.
  • a hydrocarbon-based oil of animal origin that may be mentioned is perhydrosqualene.
  • the triglyceride oils of plant or synthetic origin are preferably chosen from liquid fatty acid triglycerides including from 6 to 30 carbon atoms, for instance heptanoic or octanoic acid triglycerides, or alternatively, for example, sunflower oil, corn oil, soybean oil, marrow oil, grapeseed oil, sesame seed oil, hazelnut oil, apricot oil, macadamia oil, arara oil, castor oil, avocado oil, caprylic/capric acid triglycerides, for instance those sold by the company Stearinerie Dubois or those sold under the names Miglyol® 810, 812 and 818 by the company Dynamit Nobel, jojoba oil and shea butter oil, and mixtures thereof.
  • liquid fatty acid triglycerides including from 6 to 30 carbon atoms, for instance heptanoic or octanoic acid triglycerides, or alternatively, for example, sunflower oil, corn oil,
  • fluoro oils they may be chosen from perfluoromethylcyclopentane and perfluoro-l,3-dimethylcyclohexane, sold under the names Flutec® PCI and Flutec® PC3 by the company BNFL Fluorochemicals; perfluoro-l,2-dimethylcyclobutane; perfluoroalkanes such as dodecafluoropentane and tetradecafluorohexane, sold under the names PF 5050® and PF 5060® by the company 3M, or bromoperfluorooctyl sold under the name Foralkyl® by the company Atochem; nonafluoromethoxybutane and nonafluoroethoxyisobutane; perfluoromorpholine derivatives such as 4-trifluoromethylperfluoromorpholine sold under the name PF 5052® by the company 3M.
  • fatty alcohol means a long-chain aliphatic alcohol comprising from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 40 carbon atoms, and comprising at least one hydroxyl group OH. These fatty alcohols are neither oxyalkylenated nor glycerolated.
  • the liquid fatty alcohols that are suitable for use in the invention are more particularly chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alcohols, preferably unsaturated or branched alcohols, including from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • Examples that may be mentioned include octyl dodecanol, 2-butyloctanol, 2-hexyldecanol, 2-undecylpentadecanol, isostearyl alcohol, oleyl alcohol, linolenyl alcohol, ricinoleyl alcohol, undecylenyl alcohol and linoleyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof.
  • liquid esters of fatty acids and/or of fatty alcohols other than the triglycerides mentioned above mention may be made notably of esters of saturated or unsaturated, linear Ci to C26 or branched C3 to C26 aliphatic monoacids or polyacids and of saturated or unsaturated, linear Ci to C26 or branched C3 to C26 aliphatic monoalcohols or polyalcohols, the total carbon number of the esters being greater than or equal to 6 and more advantageously greater than or equal to 10.
  • At least one from among the alcohol and the acid from which the esters of the invention are derived is branched.
  • dihydroabietyl behenate octyldodecyl behenate; isocetyl behenate; isostearyl lactate; lauryl lactate; linoleyl lactate; oleyl lactate; isostearyl octanoate; isocetyl octanoate; octyl octanoate; decyl oleate; isocetyl isostearate; isocetyl laurate; isocetyl stearate; isodecyl octanoate; isodecyl oleate; isononyl isononanoate; isostearyl palmitate; methyl acetyl ricinoleate; octyl isononanoate; 2-ethylhexyl isononanoate; octyldodecy
  • ethyl palmitate and isopropyl palmitate alkyl myristates such as isopropyl myristate or ethyl myristate, isocetyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl isononanoate, isodecyl neopentanoate and isostearyl neopentanoate, and mixtures thereof.
  • esters of C4 to C22 dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acids and of Ci to C22 alcohols and esters of mono-, di- or tricarboxylic acids and of C2 to C26 di-, tri-, tetra- or pentahydroxy alcohols may also be used.
  • composition may also comprise, as fatty ester, sugar esters and diesters of Ce to C30, preferably C12 to C22, fatty acids.
  • sugar esters refers to oxygen-bearing hydrocarbon-based compounds bearing several alcohol functions, with or without aldehyde or ketone functions, and which include at least 4 carbon atoms.
  • sugars may be monosaccharides, oligosaccharides or polysaccharides.
  • suitable sugars include sucrose, glucose, galactose, ribose, fucose, maltose, fructose, mannose, arabinose, xylose and lactose, and derivatives thereof, notably alkyl derivatives, such as methyl derivatives, for instance methylglucose.
  • the sugar esters of fatty acids may be chosen notably from the group comprising the esters or mixtures of esters of sugars described previously and of linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated G to C30 and preferably C12 to C22 fatty acids. If they are unsaturated, these compounds may comprise one to three conjugated or unconjugated carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • esters according to this variant may also be chosen from mono-, di-, tri- and tetraesters, polyesters, and mixtures thereof. These esters may be, for example, oleates, laurates, palmitates, myristates, behenates, cocoates, stearates, linoleates, linolenates, caprates, arachidonates or mixtures thereof, for instance notably the mixed oleopalmitate, oleostearate and palmitostearate esters.
  • monoesters and diesters and notably sucrose, glucose or methylglucose mono- or di-oleates, -stearates, -behenates, - oleopalmitates, -linoleates, -linolenates and -oleostearates, and mixtures thereof.
  • liquid ester of a monoacid and of a monoalcohol Preferably, use will be made of a liquid ester of a monoacid and of a monoalcohol.
  • the silicone oils that may be used in the composition according to the present invention may be volatile or non-volatile, cyclic, linear or branched silicone oils, which are unmodified or modified with organic groups, and preferably have a viscosity from 5xl0 6 to 2.5 m 2 /s at 25°C, and preferably lxlO 5 to 1 m 2 /s.
  • the silicone oils are chosen from polydialkylsiloxanes, notably polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS), and liquid polyorganosiloxanes including at least one aryl group.
  • PDMS polydimethylsiloxanes
  • liquid polyorganosiloxanes including at least one aryl group.
  • silicone oils may also be organomodified.
  • organomodified silicone oils that may be used in accordance with the invention are preferably liquid silicones as defined previously and including in their structure one or more organofunctional groups attached via a hydrocarbon-based group, chosen, for example, from amine groups and alkoxy groups.
  • Organopolysiloxanes are defined in greater detail in Walter Noll’s Chemistry and Technology of Silicones (1968), Academic Press. They may be volatile or non volatile.
  • silicone oils are more particularly chosen from those with a boiling point of between 60°C and 260°C, and even more particularly from:
  • cyclic polydialkylsiloxanes including from 3 to 7 and preferably from 4 to 5 silicon atoms.
  • cyclic polydialkylsiloxanes including from 3 to 7 and preferably from 4 to 5 silicon atoms.
  • octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane sold notably under the name Volatile Silicone® 7207 by Union Carbide or Silbione® 70045 V2 by Rhodia
  • decamethylcyclopentasiloxane sold under the name Volatile Silicone® 7158 by Union Carbide
  • Silbione® 70045 V5 by Rhodia
  • cyclocopolymers of the dimethylsiloxane/methylalkylsiloxane type such as Volatile Silicone® FZ 3109 sold by the company Union Carbide.
  • linear volatile polydialkylsiloxanes containing 2 to 9 silicon atoms and having a viscosity of less than or equal to 5x 10 6 m 2 /s at 25°C.
  • An example is decamethyltetrasiloxane notably sold under the name SH 200 by the company Toray Silicone. Silicones falling within this category are also described in the article published in Cosmetics and Toiletries, Vol. 91, Jan. 76, pp. 27-32, Todd & Byers Volatile Silicone Fluids for Cosmetics.
  • silicone oils may be more particularly chosen from polydialkylsiloxanes, among which mention may be made mainly of polydimethylsiloxanes bearing trimethylsilyl end groups.
  • the viscosity of the silicones is measured at 25°C according to the standard ASTM 445, Appendix C.
  • oils of the 200 series from the company Dow Corning such as DC200 with a viscosity of 60 000 mm 2 /s;
  • CTFA dimethiconol
  • organomodified silicones that may be used in accordance with the invention are silicones as defined above and including in their structure one or more organofunctional groups attached via a hydrocarbon-based group.
  • liquid polyorganosiloxanes including at least one aryl group may notably be polydiphenylsiloxanes, and polyalkylarylsiloxanes functionalized with the organofunctional groups mentioned previously.
  • the polyalkylarylsiloxanes are particularly chosen from linear and/or branched polydimethyl/methylphenylsiloxanes and polydimethyl/diphenylsiloxanes with a viscosity ranging from 1 x 10 5 to 5x 10 2 m 2 /s at 25°C.
  • examples that may be mentioned include the products sold under the following names:
  • oils of the SF series from General Electric such as SF 1023, SF 1154, SF 1250 and SF 1265.
  • organomodified silicones mention may be made of polyorganosiloxanes including:
  • substituted or unsubstituted amine groups such as the products sold under the names GP 4 Silicone Fluid and GP 7100 by the company Genesee or the products sold under the names Q2 8220 and Dow Corning 929 or 939 by the company Dow Corning.
  • the substituted amine groups are in particular Cl to C4 aminoalkyl groups;
  • the colour-removing composition comprises at least one liquid fatty substance chosen from triglycerides oils of plant or synthetic origin, preferentially chosen from caprylic/capric acid triglycerides.
  • the solid fatty substances according to the invention preferably have a viscosity of greater than 2 Pa.s, measured at 25°C and at a shear rate of 1 s 1 .
  • the solid fatty substance(s) are preferably chosen from solid fatty acids, solid fatty alcohols, solid esters of fatty acids and/or of fatty alcohols, waxes, ceramides and mixtures thereof.
  • fatty acid means a long-chain carboxylic acid comprising from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the solid fatty acids according to the invention preferentially comprise from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and better still from 14 to 22 carbon atoms. They may optionally be hydroxylated. These fatty acids are neither oxyalkylenated nor glycerolated.
  • the solid fatty acids that may be used in the present invention are notably chosen from myristic acid, cetylic acid, stearylic acid, palmitic acid, arachidic acid, stearic acid, lauric acid, behenic acid, 12-hydroxy stearic acid, and mixtures thereof.
  • the solid fatty substance(s) are chosen from lauric acid, myristic acid, cetylic acid, palmitic acid and stearic acid.
  • the solid fatty alcohols may be saturated or unsaturated, and linear or branched, and include from 8 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the solid fatty alcohols have the structure R-OH with R denoting a linear alkyl group, optionally substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups, comprising from 8 to 40, preferentially from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, better still from 10 to 30, or even from 12 to 24 atoms and even better still from 14 to 22 carbon atoms.
  • the solid fatty alcohols that may be used are preferably chosen from saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched, preferably linear and saturated, (mono)alcohols including from 8 to 40 carbon atoms, better still from 10 to 30, or even from 12 to 24 and even better still from 14 to 22 carbon atoms.
  • the solid fatty alcohols that may be used may be chosen, alone or as a mixture, from: myristyl alcohol (or 1-tetradecanol); cetyl alcohol (or 1-hexadecanol); stearyl alcohol (or 1-octadecanol); arachidyl alcohol (or 1-eicosanol); behenyl alcohol (or 1- docosanol); lignoceryl alcohol (or 1-tetracosanol); ceryl alcohol (or 1-hexacosanol); montanyl alcohol (or 1-octacosanol); myricyl alcohol (or 1-triacontanol).
  • the solid fatty alcohol is chosen from cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, arachidyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof, such as cetylstearyl alcohol or cetearyl alcohol.
  • the solid fatty alcohol is myristyl alcohol.
  • the solid esters of a fatty acid and/or of a fatty alcohol that may be used are preferably chosen from esters derived from a C9-C26 carboxylic fatty acid and/or from a C9-C26 fatty alcohol.
  • these solid fatty esters are esters of a linear or branched, saturated carboxylic acid including at least 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and more particularly from 12 to 24 carbon atoms, and of a linear or branched, saturated monoalcohol, including at least 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and more particularly from 12 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • the saturated carboxylic acids may be optionally hydroxylated, and are preferably monocarboxylic acids.
  • Esters of C4-C22 dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acids and of C1-C22 alcohols and esters of monocarboxylic, dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acids and of C2-C26 dihydroxy, trihydroxy, tetrahydroxy or pentahydroxy alcohols may also be used.
  • the solid esters of a fatty acid and/or of a fatty alcohol are chosen from C9-C26 alkyl palmitates, notably myristyl palmitate, cetyl palmitate or stearyl palmitate; C9-C26 alkyl myri states, such as cetyl myristate, stearyl myristate and myristyl myristate; and C9-C26 alkyl stearates, notably myristyl stearate, cetyl stearate and stearyl stearate; and mixtures thereof.
  • C9-C26 alkyl palmitates notably myristyl palmitate, cetyl palmitate or stearyl palmitate
  • C9-C26 alkyl myri states such as cetyl myristate, stearyl myristate and myristyl myristate
  • C9-C26 alkyl stearates notably myristyl stearate, cety
  • a wax is a lipophilic compound, which is solid at 25°C and atmospheric pressure, with a reversible solid/liquid change of state, having a melting point greater than about 40°C, which may be up to 200°C, and having in the solid state anisotropic crystal organization.
  • the size of the wax crystals is such that the crystals diffract and/or scatter light, giving the composition that comprises them a more or less opaque cloudy appearance.
  • the waxes that are suitable for use in the invention may be chosen from waxes of animal, plant or mineral origin, non-silicone synthetic waxes, and mixtures thereof.
  • hydrocarbon-based waxes for instance beeswax, notably of biological origin, lanolin wax and Chinese insect waxes; rice bran wax, carnauba wax, candelilla wax, ouricury wax, esparto grass wax, berry wax, shellac wax, Japan wax and sumac wax; montan wax, orange wax and lemon wax, microcrystalline waxes, paraffins and ozokerite; polyethylene waxes, the waxes obtained by Fischer-Tropsch synthesis and waxy copolymers, and also esters thereof.
  • beeswax notably of biological origin, lanolin wax and Chinese insect waxes
  • rice bran wax carnauba wax, candelilla wax, ouricury wax, esparto grass wax, berry wax, shellac wax, Japan wax and sumac wax
  • montan wax orange wax and lemon wax
  • microcrystalline waxes microcrystalline waxes
  • paraffins and ozokerite polyethylene waxes
  • C20 to C60 microcrystalline waxes such as Micro wax HW.
  • Mention may also be made of the MW 500 polyethylene wax sold under the reference Permalen 50-L polyethylene. Mention may also be made of the waxes obtained by catalytic hydrogenation of animal or plant oils containing linear or branched C8-C32 fatty chains.
  • isomerized jojoba oil such as the trans- isomerized partially hydrogenated jojoba oil, notably the product manufactured or sold by the company Desert Whale under the commercial reference Iso-Jojoba-50®, hydrogenated sunflower oil, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated coconut oil, hydrogenated lanolin oil and bis(l,l,l-trimethylolpropane) tetrastearate, notably the product sold under the name Hest 2T-4S® by the company Heterene.
  • isomerized jojoba oil such as the trans- isomerized partially hydrogenated jojoba oil, notably the product manufactured or sold by the company Desert Whale under the commercial reference Iso-Jojoba-50®, hydrogenated sunflower oil, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated coconut oil, hydrogenated lanolin oil and bis(l,l,l-trimethylolpropane) tetrastearate, notably the product sold under the name Hest 2T-4S® by the company Heterene.
  • the waxes obtained by hydrogenation of castor oil esterified with cetyl alcohol such as those sold under the names Phytowax Castor 16L64® and 22L73® by the company Sophim, may also be used.
  • a wax that may also be used is a C20-C40 alkyl (hydroxystearyloxy)stearate (the alkyl group containing from 20 to 40 carbon atoms), alone or as a mixture.
  • a wax is notably sold under the names Kester Wax K 82 P®, Hydroxypolyester K 82 P® and Kester Wax K 80 P® by the company Koster Keunen.
  • microwaxes in the compositions of the invention; mention may be made notably of carnauba microwaxes, such as the product sold under the name MicroCare 350® by the company Micro Powders, synthetic-wax microwaxes, such as the product sold under the name MicroEase 114S® by the company Micro Powders, microwaxes constituted of a mixture of carnauba wax and polyethylene wax, such as the products sold under the names Micro Care 300® and 310® by the company Micro Powders, microwaxes constituted of a mixture of carnauba wax and of synthetic wax, such as the product sold under the name Micro Care 325® by the company Micro Powders, polyethylene microwaxes, such as the products sold under the names Micropoly 200®, 220®, 220L® and 250S® by the company Micro Powders, and polytetrafluoroethylene microwaxes, such as the products sold under the names Microslip 519® and 519 L® by the company Micro Powders.
  • the waxes are preferably chosen from mineral waxes, for instance paraffin, petroleum jelly, lignite or ozokerite wax; plant waxes, for instance cocoa butter or cork fiber or sugar cane waxes, olive tree wax, rice wax, hydrogenated jojoba wax, ouricury wax, carnauba wax, candelilla wax, alfalfa wax, or absolute waxes of flowers, such as essential wax of blackcurrant flower sold by the company Bertin (France); waxes of animal origin, for instance beeswaxes or modified beeswaxes (cerabellina), spermaceti, lanolin wax and lanolin derivatives; microcrystalline waxes; and mixtures thereof.
  • mineral waxes for instance paraffin, petroleum jelly, lignite or ozokerite wax
  • plant waxes for instance cocoa butter or cork fiber or sugar cane waxes, olive tree wax, rice wax, hydrogenated jojoba wax, ouricury wax, carnauba wax, candelill
  • ceramides or ceramide analogs such as glycoceramides, which may be used in the compositions according to the invention, are known; mention may in particular be made of ceramides of classes I, II, III and V according to the Dawning classification.
  • ceramides or analogues thereof that may be used preferably correspond to the following formula: R 3 CH(0H)CH(CH20R 2 )(NHC0R 1 ), in which:
  • R 1 denotes a linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkyl group, derived from C14-C30 fatty acids, it being possible for this group to be substituted with a hydroxyl group in the alpha position, or a hydroxyl group in the omega position esterified with a saturated or unsaturated C16-C30 fatty acid;
  • R 2 denotes a hydrogen atom, a (glycosyl)n group, a (galactosyl)m group or a sulfogalactosyl group, in which n is an integer ranging from 1 to 4 and m is an integer ranging from 1 to 8;
  • R 3 denotes a C15-C26 hydrocarbon-based group, saturated or unsaturated in the alpha position, it being possible for this group to be substituted with one or more Cl -Cl 4 alkyl groups; it being understood that in the case of natural ceramides or glycoceramides, R 3 may also denote a C15-C26 alpha-hydroxyalkyl group, the hydroxyl group being optionally esterified by a C16-C30 alpha-hydroxy acid.
  • the ceramides that are more particularly preferred are the compounds for which R 1 denotes a saturated or unsaturated alkyl derived from C16-C22 fatty acids; R 2 denotes a hydrogen atom and R 3 denotes a saturated linear Cl 5 group.
  • R 1 denotes a saturated or unsaturated alkyl radical derived from C12-C22 fatty acids
  • R 2 denotes a galactosyl or sulfogalactosyl radical
  • 2-N-linoleoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol 2-N-oleoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol
  • 2-N-stearoylaminooctadecane-l,3,4-triol and in particular N- stearoylphytosphingosine, 2-N-palmitoylaminohexadecane-l,3-diol, N- linole
  • the solid fatty substances are preferably chosen from solid fatty acids, solid fatty alcohols and mixtures thereof.
  • the colour-removing composition comprises at least one solid fatty substance chosen from solid fatty alcohols, preferably myristyl alcohol.
  • the composition according to the invention comprises at least one liquid fatty substance and at least one solid fatty substance, preferentially at least one triglyceride oil of plant or synthetic origin, more preferentially chosen from triglycerides of caprylic/capric acid and at least one solid fatty alcohol, more preferentially at least one triglyceride oil of plant or synthetic origin chosen from triglycerides of caprylic/capric acid and at least one solid fatty alcohol chosen from myristyl alcohol.
  • the total content of fatty substance(s) preferably ranges from 0.5% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 1% to 10% by weight and better still from 1% to 5% by weight, relative to the total weight of the composition.
  • the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one water-soluble organic solvent chosen from monoalcohols containing from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, such as ethanol, isopropanol and butanol.
  • the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may comprise water.
  • the colour-removing composition does not comprise any water.
  • the additives as mentioned above may be included in the colour- removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention. Protocol
  • the hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D described above may be used on wet or dry hair keratin fibers, and also on any type of fair or dark, natural or coloured, permanent-waved, bleached or relaxed hair keratin fibers.
  • the hair colouring composition C and composition D are applied simultaneously to the hair keratin fibers.
  • composition D is applied to the hair keratin fibers after applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers.
  • composition D is applied to the hair keratin fibers before applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers.
  • the hair keratin fibers are washed before applying the hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D.
  • a washing, rinsing, draining or drying step is performed after applying the hair colouring composition to the hair keratin fibers and before applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers.
  • a drying step is performed after applying the hair colouring composition to the hair keratin fibers and before applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers.
  • the application to the hair keratin fibers may be performed via any standard means, in particular using a comb, a fine brush, a coarse brush, a sponge or with the fingers.
  • the application of the hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D to the hair keratin fibers is generally performed at room temperature (between 15 and 25°C).
  • the hair colouring composition C After applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers, it is possible to wait for between 1 minute and 6 hours, in particular between 1 minute and 2 hours, more particularly between 1 minute and 1 hour, more preferentially between 1 minute and 30 minutes, before, for example, applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers or, for example, a washing, rinsing, draining or drying step.
  • the hair keratin fibers may be left to dry or may be dried, for example at a temperature of greater than or equal to 30°C.
  • the process according to the invention may thus comprise a step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers using a heating tool.
  • the heat application step of the process of the invention may be performed using a hood, a hairdryer, a straightening iron, a curling iron, a Climazon, etc.
  • the heat application step of the process of the invention is performed using a hairdryer.
  • the step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers takes place after applying the hair colouring composition and the optional composition D to the hair keratin fibers.
  • a mechanical action may be exerted on the locks, such as combing, brushing or running the fingers through.
  • the temperature is preferably between 30°C and 110°C, preferentially between 50°C and 90°C.
  • the temperature is preferably between 110°C and 220°C, preferably between 140°C and 200°C.
  • the process of the invention involves a step (bl) of applying heat using a hood, a hairdryer or a Climazon, preferably a hairdryer, and a step (b2) of applying heat using a straightening or curling iron, preferably a straightening iron.
  • Step (bl) may be performed before step (b2).
  • the hair keratin fibers may be dried, for example at a temperature of greater than or equal to 30°C. According to a particular embodiment, this temperature is greater than 40°C. According to a particular embodiment, this temperature is greater than 45°C and less than 110°C.
  • the hair keratin fibers are dried, they are dried, in addition to a supply of heat, with a flow of air. This flow of air during drying makes it possible to improve the strand separation of the coating.
  • step (b2) a mechanical action may be exerted on the locks, such as combing, brushing or running the fingers through.
  • the passage of the straightening or curling iron preferably the straightening iron, may be performed at a temperature ranging from 110°C to 220°C, preferably between 140°C and 200°C.
  • a shaping step may be performed, for example with a straightening iron; the temperature for the shaping step is between 110 and 220°C, preferably between 140 and 200°C.
  • the invention is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, such as the hair, which have been coloured beforehand, notably comprising: i) the application to said hair keratin fibers of the hair colouring composition C as described above, and then ii) optionally a leave-on time of said hair colouring composition C on the fibers of from 1 minute to 30 minutes, preferably from 1 to 20 minutes, and then iii) optionally a step of washing, rinsing, draining or drying said hair keratin fibers, and then iv) the application to said hair keratin fibers of a composition D comprising at least one silicone compound comprising at least one carboxylic group as described previously; and then v) optionally a leave-on time of said composition D on the fibers of from 1 minute to 30 minutes, preferably from 1 to 20 minutes, and then vi) optionally a step of washing, rinsing, draining or drying said fibers.
  • the step of applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers is repeated several times.
  • the colour-removing process is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, such as the hair, which have been coloured beforehand, notably comprising a step of extemporaneous mixing at the time of use of at least two compositions A and B to obtain the hair colouring composition C as defined above and of applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers, with:
  • composition A comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound as described previously;
  • composition B comprising at least one compound, different from the associative polymers as described previously, containing at least one carboxylic acid group as described previously; composition A and/or composition B comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof; composition A and/or composition B optionally comprising at least one silicone as defined previously.
  • composition B comprises at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes, and mixtures thereof, and composition A does not comprise any colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes, and mixtures thereof.
  • compositions A and B are mixed preferably less than 15 minutes before application to the hair keratin fibers, more preferentially less than 10 minutes before application, better still less than 5 minutes before application.
  • composition A and composition B preferably ranges from 0.1 to 10, preferentially from 0.2 to 5 and better still from 0.5 to 2, or even from 0.6 to 1.5. In a particular embodiment, the weight ratio between composition A and composition B is equal to 1.
  • the colour-removing process is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, such as the hair, notably comprising a step of extemporaneous mixing at the time of use of at least two compositions A and B to obtain the hair colouring composition C as defined above and in applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers, with:
  • composition A comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound as described previously;
  • composition B comprising at least one compound, different from the associative polymers as described previously, containing at least one carboxylic acid group as described previously, and at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes, and mixtures thereof; composition A and/or composition B optionally comprising at least one silicone as defined previously, and a composition D as described previously being applied to the hair keratin fibers before and/or after, preferably after, the application of the mixture of compositions A and B to the hair keratin fibers.
  • the process according to the invention comprises the application of at least one composition for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, as defined above, which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition as defined above.
  • the colour-removing composition is then rinsed out after an optional leave-on time, optionally followed by shampoo washing.
  • the colour-removing composition is left on for 30 seconds to 60 minutes, preferentially from 1 to 30 minutes, more preferentially from 1 to 15 minutes and better still from 2 to 10 minutes, before being rinsed out.
  • the process according to the invention also comprises a step of massaging the hair keratin fibers, after the application of the colour-removing composition.
  • a particular tool such as an exfoliating glove may be used.
  • the fingers are passed along the lock five times.
  • the total duration of the five passes may range from 30 seconds to 2 minutes, for example, per 1 g of lock.
  • the step of massaging the hair keratin fibers may be repeated several times, for example twice, optionally with an intermediate leave-on time.
  • the step of applying the colour-removing composition may be repeated several times, optionally with intermediate rinsing.
  • the time between the step of applying the hair colouring composition and the step of applying the colour-removing composition may range from a few minutes to several days, for example several tens of days.
  • the time between the step of applying the hair colouring composition and the step of applying the colour-removing composition ranges from 1 hour to 30 days, more preferentially from 1 day to 15 days.
  • the optional massaging step may subsequently be followed by a step of washing the hair keratin fibers, for example using a shampoo.
  • the hair keratin fibers may then be massaged, rinsed and dried.
  • the invention also relates to a composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
  • the hair colouring composition is the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention.
  • the cationic surfactant and the polyol are as defined above, respectively.
  • the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants are present in a total content ranging from 0.5% to 5% by weight, better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the polyol(s) are present in a total content ranging from 35% to 95% by weight, more preferentially from 35% to 85% by weight, and even more preferentially from 35% to 70% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour- removing composition.
  • the colour-removing composition according to the invention may also comprise at least one alkyl or alkylene carbonate as described previously.
  • the content of alkyl or alkylene carbonate(s) ranges from 10% to 60% by weight, preferably from 15% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
  • the colour-removing composition according to the invention may also comprise at least one glycol ether different from the polyols as described previously.
  • the other ingredients that may be included in the colour-removing composition as used in the context of the process according to the invention, as described above, may be included in the colour-removing composition according to the invention.
  • the present invention also relates to the use of the composition for removing hair colour, according to the invention or as used in the context of the process according to the invention, from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
  • the hair colouring composition is as defined above.
  • the present invention will now be described more specifically by means of examples, which do not in any way limit the scope of the invention. However, the examples make it possible to support specific characteristics, variants and preferred embodiments of the invention.
  • the (poly)carbodiimide(s) of the invention are accessible via synthetic methods known to those skilled in the art starting from commercial products or reagents that can be synthesized according to chemical reactions that are also known to those skilled in the art. Mention may be made, for example, of the book Sciences of Synthesis - Houben - Weyl Methods of Molecular Transformations, 2005, Georg Thiem Verlag Kg, Rudigerstrasse 14, D-70469 Stuttgart, or the American patent US 4 284730 or the Canadian patent application CA 2 509 861. More particularly, the process for preparing the (poly)carbodiimides of the invention involves, in a first step, a diisocyanate reagent (1):
  • Li is as defined previously, which reacts in the presence of a carboimidation catalyst (2) such as those described in US 4 284 730, notably phosphorus-based catalysts particularly chosen from phospholene oxides and phospholene sulfoxides, diaza- and oxaza-phospholanes, preferably under an inert atmosphere (nitrogen or argon), and in particular in a polar solvent which is preferably aprotic such as THF, glyme, diglyme, 1,4-dioxane or DMF, at a temperature between room temperature and the reflux temperature of the solvent, preferably at about 140°C; to give the carbodiimide diisocyanate compound (3):
  • a carboimidation catalyst (2) such as those described in US 4 284 730, notably phosphorus-based catalysts particularly chosen from phospholene oxides and phospholene sulfoxides, diaza- and oxaza-phospholanes, preferably under an inert atmosphere (nitrogen or argon), and in
  • compound (3) reacts with 1 molar equivalent (1 eq.) of nucleophilic reagent Ri-Xi-H and then 0.5 eq. of reagent H-E-H with Ri, Xi and E as defined previously, to give the “symmetrical” compound (4) according to the invention:
  • compound (3) reacts with 1 molar equivalent (1 eq.) of nucleophilic reagent Ri-Xi-H and then 1 eq. of reagent H-E-H with Ri, Xi and E as defined previously, to give compound (5):
  • the (poly)carbodiimide compounds, and similarly all the reaction intermediates and reagents, may be purified via conventional methods known to those skilled in the art, such as extraction with water and water-immiscible organic solvent, precipitation, centrifugation, filtration and/or chromatography.
  • Example 1 Process for synthesizing the (poly)carbodiimide compound
  • a mixture of 5.3 g of polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether and 1.2 g of 1,4- butanediol are introduced with stirring into the reaction medium.
  • the temperature of 120°C is maintained until the isocyanate functions have totally disappeared, monitored by infrared spectroscopy at 2200-2300 cm 1 , and is then cooled to room temperature.
  • reaction medium After cooling to room temperature, the reaction medium is poured dropwise with vigorous stirring into a 500 mL glass beaker containing 85 g of distilled water, to give the desired product in the form of a translucent yellow liquid.
  • compositions A and B as described below were prepared: the amounts are expressed as g of starting material as obtained/100 g.
  • composition A is mixed with composition B in a 50/50 mass ratio (0.4 g for composition A and 0.4 g for composition B) to obtain a composition C.
  • composition C is a hair colouring composition according to the invention.
  • composition D as described below was prepared: the amounts are expressed as g of starting material as obtained/100 g.
  • compositions El to E4 are colour-removing compositions according to the invention.
  • Composition C is applied to locks of dry natural hair containing 90% white hairs, at a rate of 0.8 g of composition per gram of lock.
  • the locks of hair are then dried with a hairdryer, and then combed.
  • composition D is applied to said locks of dry hair treated with composition C, in a proportion of 0.5 g of composition per gram of lock.
  • the locks of hair thus coloured are subsequently stored at 60°C for 48 hours, and then undergo a colour removal treatment.
  • composition C The locks of hair coloured with composition C are treated with each of the compositions El to E4.
  • compositions El to E4 are applied to a lock of coloured hair at a rate of 2 g of composition per gram of lock.
  • the locks of hair are pinched between two fingers with exfoliant gloves six times from the root to the end, and are then massaged six times between two fingers from the root to the end. The two actions are alternated for five minutes. Next, the exfoliant gloves are removed and the locks of hair are then rinsed with water.
  • the locks are then washed with a multivitamin shampoo (Elseve Multivitamines). Fingers are passed along the lock six times with 0.4 g of multivitamin shampoo per gram of lock.
  • a multivitamin shampoo Elseve Multivitamines
  • the locks are then rinsed with water and dried.
  • compositions E3 and E4 have excellent decolourizing power (or colour-removing power). The best results are obtained for compositions E3 and E4.
  • the process according to the invention makes it possible to improve the removal of the colour from a lock of hair which has been coloured beforehand using a hair colouring composition
  • a hair colouring composition comprising a (poly)carbodiimide compound and a colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Birds (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Cosmetics (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand, comprising the application of at least one colour-removing composition to said hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition comprising: at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound; and at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof; said colour-removing composition comprising: at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant; and at least one polyol.

Description

DESCRIPTION
TITLE: Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition
The present invention relates to a process for removing the colour from previously coloured hair keratin fibers comprising the application of at least one colour-removing composition to said hair keratin fibers, which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition comprising a (poly)carbodiimide compound and at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, said colour-removing composition comprising at least one surfactant and at least one polyol.
The invention also relates to a composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
- at least 0.5% by weight of at least one surfactant relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition;
- at least 35% by weight of at least one polyol relative to the weight of the colour- removing composition.
The present invention also relates to the use of the colour-removing composition according to the invention, or as used in the context of the process according to the invention, on hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
Technical field
In the field of colouring hair keratin fibers, in particular human hair keratin fibers, it is already known practice to colour hair keratin fibers via various techniques using direct dyes or pigments for non-permanent colouring, or dye precursors for permanent colouring.
There are essentially three types of process for colouring the hair: a) “permanent” colouring, the function of which is to afford a substantial modification to the natural colour and which uses oxidation dyes which penetrate into the hair fiber and forms the dye via an oxidative condensation process; b) non-permanent, semi-permanent or direct colouring, which does not use the oxidative condensation process and withstands four or five shampoo washes; it consists in colouring hair keratin fibers with colour compositions containing direct dyes; c) temporary colouring, which gives rise to a modification of the natural colour of the hair that remains from one shampoo wash to the next, and which serves to enhance or correct a shade that has already been obtained. It may also be likened to a “makeup” process.
For this last type of colouring, it is known practice to use coloured polymers formed by grafting one or more dyes of azo, triphenylmethane, azine, indoamine or anthraquinone nature onto a polymer chain. These coloured polymers are not entirely satisfactory, notably as regards the homogeneity of the colouring obtained and its resistance, not to mention the problems associated with their manufacture and notably with their reproducibility.
Another colouring method consists in using pigments. Specifically, the use of pigment on the surface of hair keratin fibers generally makes it possible to obtain visible colourings on dark hair, since the surface pigment masks the natural colour of the fiber. This colouring method may also make it possible to have available colour compositions which have the advantage of producing a uniform coloured coating on hair keratin fibers, notably the hair, while at the same time forming a coat which withstands shampoo washing and the various attacking factors to which the hair may be subjected such as brushing and/or friction, without degradation of the hair.
However, no processes exist using colour-removing compositions that are efficient on hair that has been coloured beforehand with this type of temporary hair colouring composition, which is persistent with respect to shampoo washing.
A need thus remains for a process for efficiently removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand using said colour compositions that are persistent with respect to shampoo washing.
Thus, the aim of the present invention is to develop a process for treating hair keratin fibers which makes it possible to obtain very good efficiency as regards hair colour removal.
Disclosure of the invention
This aim is achieved with the present invention, one subject of which is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand, comprising the application of at least one colour-removing composition to said hair keratin fibers using at least one hair colouring composition comprising:
- at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound; and
- at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof; said colour-removing composition comprising:
- at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant; and
- at least one polyol.
The invention also relates to a composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
- at least 0.5% by weight of at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition;
- at least 35% by weight of at least one polyol relative to the total weight of the colour- removing composition.
The invention also relates to the use of the colour-removing composition according to the invention, or as used in the context of the process according to the invention, on hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
Other subjects, characteristics, aspects and advantages of the invention will emerge even more clearly on reading the description and the examples that follow.
In the text hereinbelow, unless otherwise indicated, the limits of a range of values are included in that range, notably in the expressions “between” and “ranging from ... to
The expression “at least one” used in the present description is equivalent to the expression “one or more”.
The invention is not limited to the illustrated examples. The characteristics of the various examples may notably be combined within variants which are not illustrated.
For the purposes of the present invention and unless otherwise indicated:
- an “alkyl” radical denotes a linear or branched saturated radical containing, for example, from 1 to 20 carbon atoms;
- an “ aminoalkyl ” radical denotes an alkyl radical as defined previously, said alkyl radical comprising an NFh group; - a “ hydroxy alky G radical denotes an alkyl radical as defined previously, said alkyl radical comprising an OH group;
- an “ alkylene ” radical denotes a linear or branched divalent saturated C2-C4 hydrocarbon-based group such as methylene, ethylene or propylene;
- a “ cycloalkyl ” or “alley cloalky G radical denotes a cyclic saturated monocyclic or bicyclic, preferably monocyclic, hydrocarbon-based group comprising from 1 to 3 rings, preferably 2 rings, and comprising from 3 to 24 carbon atoms, in particular comprising from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more particularly from 3 to 13 carbon atoms, even more particularly from 3 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably between 5 and 10 carbon atoms, such as cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or norbomyl, in particular cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl, it being understood that the cycloalkyl radical may be substituted with one or more (Ci-C4)alkyl groups such as methyl; preferably, the cycloalkyl radical is then an isobornyl group;
- a “ cycloalkylene” radical denotes a divalent cycloalkyl group with “ cycloalkyl ” as defined previously, preferably of C3-C12;
- an “aryl” radical is a monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic, fused or non-fused, unsaturated and aromatic hydrocarbon-based cyclic radical, comprising from 6 to 14 carbon atoms, preferably between 6 and 12 carbon atoms; preferably, the aryl group comprises 1 ring of 6 carbon atoms such as phenyl, naphthyl, anthryl, phenanthryl and biphenyl, it being understood that the aryl radical may be substituted with one or more (Ci-C4)alkyl groups such as methyl, preferably tolyl, xylyl, or methylnaphthyl; preferably, the aryl group represents phenyl;
- an “ arylene ” radical is a divalent aryl radical with “aryl” as defined previously; preferably, arylene represents phenylene;
- a “ heterocyclic ” radical denotes a saturated or unsaturated, non-aromatic or aromatic, monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon-based radical, comprising one or more heteroatoms, preferably from 1 to 5 atoms chosen from O, S or N, including from 3 to 20 ring members, preferably between 5 and 10 ring members, such as imidazolyl, pyrrolyl and furanyl;
- a “ heterocycloalkylene ” radical is a divalent heterocyclic group with “ heterocyclic ” as defined previously;
- an “ aryloxy ” radical denotes an aryl-oxy with “aryl” as defined previously;
- an “ alkoxy ” radical denotes an alkyl-oxy radical with “alkyl” as defined previously; - an “ acyloxy ” radical denotes an ester radical R-C(0)-0- with R being an alkyl group as defined previously;
- a “ reactive ” group is a group that is capable of forming a covalent bond with another identical or different group, by chemical reaction.
The term “hair keratin fibers” means the hair.
For the purposes of the present invention, the expression “hair” means the hair of the head. It does not refer to eyelashes, eyebrows and body hair.
The expression “colour-removing composition” is equivalent to “composition for removing (the) colour from hair keratin fibers” and to “composition for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers”.
Polycarbodiimide compound
As indicated previously, the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound.
The composition may comprise at least two different (poly)carbodiimide compounds, present as a mixture in the composition.
The term “(poly) carbodiimide compound” means a compound comprising one or more carbodiimide groups, preferably at least two carbodiimide groups, more preferentially at least three carbodiimide groups; in particular, the number of carbodiimide groups does not exceed 200, preferably 150, more preferentially 100.
The term “carbodiimide group ” means a divalent linear triatomic fraction of general formula -(N=C=N)-.
The (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) according to the invention may optionally comprise in their structure one or more reactive groups different from carbodiimide groups, chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups.
The reactive group(s) other than the carbodiimide groups may be side or end groups. Preferably, the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) comprise one or more end groups different from carbodiimide groups, preferably one or more end groups chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups.
According to a particular embodiment, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (I) below:
Figure imgf000007_0001
(I), in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
- Ri and R2 independently represent a group chosen from a hydrocarbon-based radical, preferably alkyl, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, a group chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups, and a hydrocarbon-based radical, preferably alkyl, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms and with one or more groups chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000; and
- A is a monomer chosen from the compounds below:
Figure imgf000008_0001
According to another embodiment, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (la) below:
Figure imgf000008_0002
in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
- Yi and Y2 independently represent a divalent organic radical chosen from a saturated Ci to C36 aliphatic group or a Ce to C24 aromatic or alkylaromatic group, the aliphatic or aromatic group optionally comprising one or more non-pendent heteroatoms, such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or combinations thereof;
- Zi and Z2 independently represent a reactive end group or an inert end group;
- as inert end group, Zi and Z2 may represent, independently, a saturated, linear or branched or cyclic Ci to C50 aliphatic group, or a Ce to Cis aromatic group, said aliphatic and aromatic groups optionally comprising from 1 to 10 heteroatoms chosen from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and combinations thereof, and the aliphatic or aromatic group may be partially or totally fluorinated; in this variant, Zi and Z2 comprise a bonding group CG connecting Zi to Yi and Z2 to Y2, the group CG possibly being a single covalent bond, a saturated C-C bond, an unsaturated covalent C-C bond, an amide group, an ester group, a carbonate group, a thioester group, an ether group, a urethane group, a thiourethane group or a urea group;
- as reactive end group, Zi and Z2 may be chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxy silyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxy alkyl silyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbomenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups;
- Q represents an organopolymer or an organooligomer comprising repeating units of saturated, linear or branched or cyclic aliphatic groups, or of aromatic groups or alkylaromatic groups, coupled via carbonate, ester, ether, amide, urethane or urea repeating bonds or combinations thereof;
- A represents a divalent aliphatic, aromatic, alkylaromatic or linear, saturated, branched or cyclic radical containing from 2 to 30 carbon atoms, which may optionally comprise one or more non-pendent heteroatoms such as a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or combinations thereof, in the aliphatic chain or the aromatic chain;
- r denotes an integer equal to 0 or 1 ;
- m denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, preferably equal to 0 or 1;
- m’ denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, preferably equal to 0 or 1;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, preferably equal to 0 or 1, with m+ (m’*n ) ³ 2.
Preferably, Zi and Z2 independently represent a reactive end group; more preferentially, Zi and Z2 independently represent a group chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbomenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups.
Such (poly)carbodiimide compounds are sold, for example, by the company Stahl B.V, under the name Permutex XR, or under the name RelcaLinklO., under the name Picassian XL and Nisshinbo compounds sold under the name Carbodilite with the series V-02, V-02-L2, SV-02, E-02, V-10, SW-12G, E-03A, E-04DG-T, E-05, V-
04, V-02B, V-04PF, V-05.
Preferably, the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) below:
Figure imgf000010_0001
(P), in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
- Ri and R2 independently represent a hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 3;
- Li independently represents a Ci-Cis divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof;
- E independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-, in which R3 and R4 independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- R5 independently represents a covalent bond or a saturated divalent hydrocarbon- based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- R6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms. The term “ hydrocarbon-based radical ” means a saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched radical containing from 1 to 300 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 250 carbon atoms, more preferentially from 1 to 200 carbon atoms. Preferably, the hydrocarbon-based radical is a saturated linear radical.
The hydrocarbon-based radical may comprise one or more cyclic groups.
The hydrocarbon-based radical may be interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, in particular chosen from O, S or N and/or substituted with one or more cations, anions or zwitterions or cationic groups such as ammonium, anionic groups such as carboxylate, or zwitterionic groups, and/or comprising a metal ion which may be incorporated in the form of a salt.
The term “ heteroatom(s )” means an oxygen O, sulfur S or nitrogen N atom, and also halogen atoms such as Cl, F, Br and I. If the heteroatom is included in the chain of the hydrocarbon-based radical, the heteroatom is preferably chosen from oxygen O, sulfur S or nitrogen N atoms.
Preferably, Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom.
Preferably, Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxy carboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof.
In a preferred embodiment, Ri and R2 are independently chosen from groups
(i) to (iv) below:
(i) the compound of formula (III) below:
RV-0-C(0)-C(R8)(H)- (III), in which R7 represents a Ci-C3alkyl group and Rx represents a hydrogen atom or a Ci- C3 alkyl group; preferably, R7 is a methyl and Rx is a hydrogen atom or a methyl.
(ii) the compound of formula (IV) below:
R9-[0-CH2-C(H)(Rio)]p- (IV), in which R9 represents a Ci-C4alkyl group, Rio represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group and p denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 3; preferably, R9 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl, Rio is a hydrogen atom or a methyl and p is equal to 1.
(iii) the compound of formula (V) below:
(Rii)2N-CH2-C(H)(Ri2)- (V), in which R11 represents a Ci-C4alkyl group and R12 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group; preferably, R11 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and R12 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl.
(iv) the compound of formula (VI) below: Rl3-[0-CH2-C(H)(Rl4)]q- (VI), in which R13 represents a Ci-C4alkyl group or a phenyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30; preferably, R13 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and Ri4 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl.
Preferably, Ri and R2 independently represent a compound of formula (VI) in which Ri3 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
According to an alternative embodiment, Ri and R2 are different and one of the radicals Ri or R2 represents a compound of formula (IV) as described above and the other radical Ri or R2 represents a compound of formula (VI) as described above.
Preferably, in formula (IV), R9 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and Rio is a hydrogen atom or a methyl and p is equal to 1.
Preferably, in formula (VI), R13 is a methyl, ethyl or butyl and Ri4 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
According to another alternative embodiment, Ri and R2 are identical and represent a compound of formula (VI) in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
Preferably, n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 20, more preferentially from 2 to 20.
Preferably, z denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 20, more preferentially from 2 to 20.
Preferably, w is equal to 1.
Preferably, w is equal to 1, n+z denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 10.
Preferably, Li is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical such as methylene, ethylene and propylene, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene and cyclohexylene, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group such as imidazolene, pyrrol ene and furanylene, or a C6-C14 arylene group such as phenylene, and mixtures thereof.
For example, Li may be chosen from a radical derived from tolylene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, 2,2,4- trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,12-dodecane diisocyanate, norbornane diisocyanate, 2,4-bis(8-isocyanatooctyl)-l,3-dioctylcyclobutane, 4,4’- dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate, tetramethylxylylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, 1,5-napththylene diisocyanate, 4,4’-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 4,4’- diphenyldimethylmethane diisocyanate and phenylene diisocyanate, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, Li is chosen from a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof, such as the compounds of formula (VII) below:
Figure imgf000013_0001
Preferably, LI is 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane corresponding to formula (VIII) below:
Figure imgf000013_0002
(VIII).
According to another embodiment, when LI is a C6-C14 arylene group, Li is not the m-tetramethylxylylene radical represented by formula (IX) below:
Figure imgf000013_0003
(IX).
As indicated previously, E independently represents a group chosen from: - -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- R5 independently represents a covalent bond or a saturated divalent hydrocarbon- based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms; and
- R6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
Preferably, R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
More preferentially, R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, butylene, propylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
Preferably, when Rs is not a covalent bond, Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical such as phenylene, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopropylene and cyclobutylene, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene and ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 is chosen from a C6- C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
More preferentially, E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, butylene, propylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
According to a particular embodiment, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is a copolymer derived from a-methylstyryl isocyanates of formula (X) below:
Figure imgf000015_0001
(X), in which R independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group containing from 3 to 24 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 24 carbon atoms, and n denotes an integer ranging from 2 to 100.
In this embodiment, the term “alkyl group” is as defined previously.
In this embodiment, the term “cycloalkyl group” is as defined previously.
In this embodiment, n may denote an integer ranging from 2 to 50, preferably from 3 to 30 and even more preferentially from 5 to 10.
According to another particular embodiment, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is a compound of formula (XI) below:
Figure imgf000015_0002
in which R independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group containing from 3 to 24 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 24 carbon atoms.
The “alkyl group”, the “cycloalkyl group” and the “aryl group” are as defined previously.
According to a preferred embodiment, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (I) or of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxycarboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof, preferably monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, more preferentially the compound of formula (VI) as described previously in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom, and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30;
- n and z, when they are present, denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
- Li, when it is present, is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof, preferably a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical;
- A, when it is present, is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof, preferably a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical;
- E, when it is present, independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C1-C18 alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
- when R5 is not a covalent bond, Rs, when it is present, is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C1-C18 alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof; and
- R6, when it is present, is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C1-C18 alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxycarboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is chosen from a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof;
- E independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C I-C IX alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
- when R5 is not a covalent bond, Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof; and
- R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
More preferentially, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 are, independently, monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical;
- E independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
- when R5 is not a covalent bond, Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof; and
- R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
Even more preferentially, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 independently represent the compound of formula (VI) below:
Rl3-[0-CH2-C(H)(Rl4)]q- (VI), in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is an C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene, cyclohexylene and 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane; and
- E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
Even more preferentially, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 independently represent the compound of formula (VI) below:
Rl3-[0-CH2-C(H)(Rl4)]q- (VI) in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, preferably from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is an C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene, cyclohexylene and 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane, preferably 4,4- dicyclohexylenemethane; and
- E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, propylene, butylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
According to a preferred embodiment, the (poly)carbodiimide compound is a compound of formula (XII) below:
Figure imgf000019_0001
(XII), in which LI is 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane, n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, preferably from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10, E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, propylene, butylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and r and s denote an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
The total amount of the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s), present in the hair colouring composition, preferably ranges from 0.01% to 30% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 25% by weight, better still from 0.2% to 20% by weight and even better still from 1% to 10% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
Colouring agent
As indicated previously, the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises one or more pigments.
The term “pigment” refers to any pigment that gives colour to keratinous materials. Their solubility in water at 25°C and at atmospheric pressure (760 mmHg) is less than 0.05% by weight, and preferably less than 0.01%. The pigments that may be used are notably chosen from the organic and/or mineral pigments known in the art, notably those described in Kirk-Othmer’s Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology and in Ullmann’s Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemistry.
They may be natural, of natural origin, or non-natural.
These pigments may be in pigment powder or paste form. They may be coated or uncoated.
The pigments may be chosen, for example, from mineral pigments, organic pigments, lakes, pigments with special effects such as nacres or glitter flakes, and mixtures thereof.
The pigment may be a mineral pigment. The term “mineral pigment” refers to any pigment that satisfies the definition in Ullmann’s encyclopaedia in the chapter on inorganic pigments. Among the mineral pigments that are useful in the present invention, mention may be made of iron oxides, chromium oxides, manganese violet, ultramarine blue, chromium hydrate, ferric blue and titanium oxide.
The pigment may be an organic pigment. The term “organic pigment” refers to any pigment that satisfies the definition in Ullmann’s encyclopaedia in the chapter on organic pigments.
The organic pigment may notably be chosen from nitroso, nitro, azo, xanthene, pyrene, quinoleine, quinoline, anthraquinone, triphenylmethane, fluorane, phthalocyanine, metal-complex, isoindolinone, isoindoline, quinacridone, perinone, perylene, diketopyrrolopyrrole, indigo, thioindigo, dioxazine, triphenylmethane and quinophthalone compounds.
In particular, the white or coloured organic pigments may be chosen from carmine, carbon black, aniline black, azo yellow, quinacridone, phthalocyanine blue, the blue pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 42090, 69800, 69825, 74100, 74160, the yellow pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 11680, 11710, 19140, 20040, 21100, 21108, 47000, 47005, the green pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 61565, 61570, 74260, the orange pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 11725, 45370, 71105, the red pigments codified in the Colour Index under the references Cl 12085, 12120, 12370, 12420, 12490, 14700, 15525, 15580, 15620, 15630, 15800, 15850, 15865, 15880, 26100, 45380, 45410, 58000, 73360, 73915, 75470, the pigments obtained by oxidative polymerization of indole or phenol derivatives as described in patent FR 2679 771. Examples that may also be mentioned include pigment pastes of organic pigments, such as the products sold by the company Hoechst under the names:
- Cosmenyl Yellow 10G: Yellow 3 pigment (Cl 11710);
- Cosmenyl Yellow G: Yellow 1 pigment (Cl 11680);
- Cosmenyl Orange GR: Orange 43 pigment (Cl 71105);
- Cosmenyl Red R: Red 4 pigment (Cl 12085);
- Cosmenyl Carmine FB: Red 5 pigment (Cl 12490);
- Cosmenyl Violet RL: Violet 23 pigment (Cl 51319);
- Cosmenyl Blue A2R: Blue 15.1 pigment (Cl 74160);
- Cosmenyl Green GG: Green 7 pigment (Cl 74260);
- Cosmenyl Black R: Black 7 pigment (Cl 77266).
The pigments in accordance with the invention may also be in the form of composite pigments, as described in patent EP 1 184 426. These composite pigments may be composed notably of particles including an inorganic core, at least one binder for attaching the organic pigments to the core, and at least one organic pigment which at least partially covers the core.
The organic pigment may also be a lake. The term “lake” means dyes adsorbed onto insoluble particles, the assembly thus obtained remaining insoluble during use.
The inorganic substrates onto which the dyes are adsorbed are, for example, alumina, silica, calcium sodium borosilicate or calcium aluminium borosilicate and aluminium.
Among the dyes, mention may be made of carminic acid. Mention may also be made of the dyes known under the following names: D&C Red 21 (Cl 45 380), D&C Orange 5 (Cl 45 370), D&C Red 27 (Cl 45 410), D&C Orange 10 (Cl 45 425), D&C Red 3 (Cl 45 430), D&C Red 4 (Cl 15 510), D&C Red 33 (Cl 17 200), D&C Yellow 5 (Cl 19 140), D&C Yellow 6 (Cl 15 985), D&C Green 5 (Cl 61 570), D&C Yellow 10 (Cl 77 002), D&C Green 3 (Cl 42053), D&C Blue 1 (Cl 42 090).
An example of a lake that may be mentioned is the product known under the following name: D&C Red 7 (Cl 15 850:1).
The pigment may also be a special effect pigment. The term “special effect pigments” means pigments that generally create a coloured appearance (characterized by a certain shade, a certain vivacity and a certain level of luminance) that is non- uniform and that changes as a function of the conditions of observation (light, temperature, angles of observation, etc.). They thereby differ from coloured pigments, which afford a standard uniform opaque, semi-transparent or transparent shade.
Several types of special effect pigments exist: those with a low refractive index, such as fluorescent or photochromic pigments, and those with a higher refractive index, such as nacres, interference pigments or glitter flakes.
Examples of pigments with special effects that may be mentioned include nacreous pigments such as mica covered with titanium or with bismuth oxychloride, coloured nacreous pigments such as mica covered with titanium and with iron oxides, mica covered with iron oxide, mica covered with titanium and notably with ferric blue or with chromium oxide, mica covered with titanium and with an organic pigment as defined previously, and also nacreous pigments based on bismuth oxychloride. Nacreous pigments that may be mentioned include the nacres Cellini sold by BASF (mica-TiCk-lake), Prestige sold by Eckart (mica-TiCk), Prestige Bronze sold by Eckart (mica-Fe2Ck) and Colorona sold by Merck (mica-TiCk-FeiCk).
Mention may also be made of the gold-coloured nacres sold notably by the company BASF under the name Brilliant gold 212G (Timica), Gold 222C (Cloisonne), Sparkle gold (Timica), Gold 4504 (Chromalite) and Monarch gold 233X (Cloisonne); the bronze nacres sold notably by the company Merck under the name Bronze fine (17384) (Colorona) and Bronze (17353) (Colorona) and by the company BASF under the name Super bronze (Cloisonne); the orange nacres sold notably by the company BASF under the name Orange 363C (Cloisonne) and Orange MCR 101 (Cosmica) and by the company Merck under the name Passion orange (Colorona) and Matte orange (17449) (Microna); the brown nacres sold notably by the company BASF under the name Nu-antique copper 340XB (Cloisonne) and Brown CL4509 (Chromalite); the nacres with a copper tint sold notably by the company BASF under the name Copper 340A (Timica); the nacres with a red tint sold notably by the company Merck under the name Sienna fine (17386) (Colorona); the nacres with a yellow tint sold notably by the company BASF under the name Yellow (4502) (Chromalite); the red nacres with a gold tint sold notably by the company BASF under the name Sunstone GO 12 (Gemtone); the pink nacres sold notably by the company BASF under the name Tan opale G005 (Gemtone); the black nacres with a gold tint sold notably by the company BASF under the name Nu antique bronze 240 AB (Timica), the blue nacres sold notably by the company Merck under the name Matte blue (17433) (Microna), the white nacres with a silvery tint sold notably by the company Merck under the name Xirona Silver, and the golden-green pink-orange nacres sold notably by the company Merck under the name Indian summer (Xirona), and mixtures thereof.
Still as examples of nacres, mention may also be made of particles including a borosilicate substrate coated with titanium oxide.
Particles comprising a glass substrate coated with titanium oxide are notably sold under the name Metashine MC1080RY by the company Toyal.
Finally, examples of nacres that may also be mentioned include polyethylene terephthalate glitter flakes, notably those sold by the company Meadowbrook Inventions under the name Silver IP 0.004X0.004 (silver glitter flakes). It is also possible to envisage multilayer pigments based on synthetic substrates, such as alumina, silica, calcium sodium borosilicate, calcium aluminium borosilicate and aluminium.
The pigments with special effects may also be chosen from reflective particles, i.e. notably from particles whose size, structure, notably the thickness of the layer(s) of which they are made and their physical and chemical nature, and surface state, allow them to reflect incident light. This reflection may, where appropriate, have an intensity sufficient to create at the surface of the composition or of the mixture, when it is applied to the support to be made up, highlight points that are visible to the naked eye, i.e. brighter points that contrast with their environment, making them appear to sparkle.
The reflective particles may be selected so as not to significantly alter the colouring effect generated by the colouring agents with which they are combined, and more particularly so as to optimize this effect in terms of colour rendition. They may more particularly have a yellow, pink, red, bronze, orange, brown, gold and/or coppery colour or tint.
These particles may have varied forms and may notably be in platelet or globular form, in particular in spherical form.
The reflective particles, whatever their form, may or may not have a multilayer structure and, in the case of a multilayer structure, may have, for example, at least one layer of uniform thickness, notably of a reflective material.
When the reflective particles do not have a multilayer structure, they may be composed, for example, of metal oxides, notably titanium or iron oxides obtained synthetically.
When the reflective particles have a multilayer structure, they may include, for example, a natural or synthetic substrate, notably a synthetic substrate at least partially coated with at least one layer of a reflective material, notably of at least one metal or metallic material. The substrate may be made of one or more organic and/or mineral materials.
More particularly, it may be chosen from glasses, ceramics, graphite, metal oxides, aluminas, silicas, silicates, notably aluminosilicates and borosilicates, and synthetic mica, and mixtures thereof, this list not being limiting.
The reflective material may include a layer of metal or of a metallic material.
Reflective particles are notably described in JP-A-09188830, JP-A-10158450, JP-A-10158541, JP-A-07258460 and JP-A-05017710.
Again as an example of reflective particles including a mineral substrate coated with a layer of metal, mention may also be made of particles including a silver- coated borosilicate substrate.
Particles with a silver-coated glass substrate, in the form of platelets, are sold under the name Microglass Metashine REFSX 2025 PS by the company Toyal. Particles with a glass substrate coated with nickel/chromium/molybdenum alloy are sold under the names Crystal Star GF 550 and GF 2525 by this same company.
Use may also be made of particles comprising a metal substrate, such as silver, aluminium, iron, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, gold, copper, zinc, tin, magnesium, steel, bronze or titanium, said substrate being coated with at least one layer of at least one metal oxide, such as titanium oxide, aluminium oxide, iron oxide, cerium oxide, chromium oxide, silicon oxides and mixtures thereof.
Examples that may be mentioned include aluminium powder, bronze powder or copper powder coated with S1O2 sold under the name Visionaire by the company Eckart.
Mention may also be made of pigments with an interference effect which are not attached to a substrate, such as liquid crystals (Helicones HC from Wacker) or interference holographic glitter flakes (Geometric Pigments or Spectra f/x from Spectratek). Pigments with special effects also comprise fluorescent pigments, whether these are substances that are fluorescent in daylight or that produce an ultraviolet fluorescence, phosphorescent pigments, photochromic pigments, thermochromic pigments and quantum dots, sold, for example, by the company Quantum Dots Corporation.
The variety of pigments that may be used in the present invention makes it possible to obtain a wide range of colours, and also particular optical effects such as metallic effects or interference effects. The size of the pigment used in the composition according to the present invention is generally between 10 nm and 200 pm, preferably between 20 nm and 80 pm and more preferentially between 30 nm and 50 pm.
The pigments may be dispersed in the composition by means of a dispersant.
The dispersant serves to protect the dispersed particles against their agglomeration or flocculation. This dispersant may be a surfactant, an oligomer, a polymer or a mixture of several thereof, bearing one or more functionalities with strong affinity for the surface of the particles to be dispersed. In particular, they may become physically or chemically attached to the surface of the pigments. These dispersants also contain at least one functional group that is compatible with or soluble in the continuous medium. In particular, esters of 12-hydroxy stearic acid in particular and of C8 to C20 fatty acid and of polyols such as glycerol or diglycerol are used, such as poly(12-hydroxystearic acid) stearate with a molecular weight of about 750 g/mol, such as the product sold under the name Solsperse 21 000 by the company Avecia, polyglyceryl-2 dipolyhydroxystearate (CTFA name) sold under the reference Dehymyls PGPH by the company Henkel, or polyhydroxystearic acid such as the product sold under the reference Arlacel PI 00 by the company Uniqema, and mixtures thereof.
As other dispersants that may be used in the compositions of the invention, mention may be made of quaternary ammonium derivatives of polycondensed fatty acids, for instance Solsperse 17 000 sold by the company Avecia, and polydimethylsiloxane/oxypropylene mixtures such as those sold by the company Dow Corning under the references DC2-5185 and DC2-5225 C.
The pigments used in the composition may be surface-treated with an organic agent.
Thus, the pigments surface-treated beforehand that are useful in the context of the invention are pigments which have been completely or partially subjected to a surface treatment of chemical, electronic, electrochemical, mechanochemical or mechanical nature with an organic agent, such as those described notably in Cosmetics and Toiletries , February 1990, Vol. 105, pages 53-64, before being dispersed in the composition in accordance with the invention. These organic agents may be chosen, for example, from waxes, for example camauba wax and beeswax; fatty acids, fatty alcohols and derivatives thereof, such as stearic acid, hydroxystearic acid, stearyl alcohol, hydroxystearyl alcohol and lauric acid and derivatives thereof; anionic surfactants; lecithins; sodium, potassium, magnesium, iron, titanium, zinc or aluminium salts of fatty acids, for example aluminium stearate or laurate; metal alkoxides; polyethylene; (meth)acrylic polymers, for example polymethyl methacrylates; polymers and copolymers containing acrylate units; alkanolamines; silicone compounds, for example silicones, notably polydimethylsiloxanes; organofluorine compounds, for example perfluoroalkyl ethers; fluorosilicone compounds.
The surface-treated pigments that are useful in the composition may also have been treated with a mixture of these compounds and/or may have undergone several surface treatments.
The surface-treated pigments that are useful in the context of the present invention may be prepared according to surface-treatment techniques that are well known to those skilled in the art, or may be commercially available as is.
Preferably, the surface-treated pigments are coated with an organic layer.
The organic agent with which the pigments are treated may be deposited on the pigments by evaporation of solvent, chemical reaction between the molecules of the surface agent or creation of a covalent bond between the surface agent and the pigments.
The surface treatment may thus be performed, for example, by chemical reaction of a surface agent with the surface of the pigments and creation of a covalent bond between the surface agent and the pigments or the fillers. This method is notably described in patent US 4 578 266.
An organic agent covalently bonded to the pigments will preferably be used.
The agent for the surface treatment may represent from 0.1% to 50% by weight of the total weight of the surface-treated pigment, preferably from 0.5% to 30% by weight and even more preferentially from 1% to 20% by weight of the total weight of the surface-treated pigment.
Preferably, the surface treatments of the pigments are chosen from the following treatments:
- a PEG-silicone treatment, for instance the AQ surface treatment sold by
LCW;
- a methicone treatment, for instance the SI surface treatment sold by LCW;
- a dimethicone treatment, for instance the Covasil 3.05 surface treatment sold by LCW;
- a dimethicone/trimethyl siloxysilicate treatment, for instance the Covasil 4.05 surface treatment sold by LCW; - a magnesium myri state treatment, for instance the MM surface treatment sold by LCW;
- an aluminium dimyristate treatment, such as the MI surface treatment sold by Miyoshi;
- a perfluoropolymethyl isopropyl ether treatment, for instance the FHC surface treatment sold by LCW;
- an isostearyl sebacate treatment, for instance the HS surface treatment sold by Miyoshi;
- a perfluoroalkyl phosphate treatment, for instance the PF surface treatment sold by Daito;
- an acrylate/dimethicone copolymer and perfluoroalkyl phosphate treatment, for instance the FSA surface treatment sold by Daito;
- a polymethylhydrogenosiloxane/perfluoroalkyl phosphate treatment, for instance the FS01 surface treatment sold by Daito;
- an acrylate/dimethicone copolymer treatment, for instance the ASC surface treatment sold by Daito;
- an isopropyl titanium triisostearate treatment, for instance the ITT surface treatment sold by Daito;
- an acrylate copolymer treatment, for instance the APD surface treatment sold by Daito;
- a perfluoroalkyl phosphate/isopropyl titanium triisostearate treatment, for instance the PF + ITT surface treatment sold by Daito.
According to a particular embodiment of the invention, the dispersant is present with organic or mineral pigments in submicron-sized particulate form.
The term “submicron” or “submicronic” refers to pigments having a particle size that has been micronized by a micronization method and having a mean particle size of less than a micrometre (pm), in particular between 0.1 and 0.9 pm, and preferably between 0.2 and 0.6 pm.
According to one embodiment, the dispersant and the pigment(s) are present in an amount (dispersanfpigment), according to a weight ratio, of between 1 :4 and 4:1, particularly between 1.5:3.5 and 3.5:1 or better still between 1.75:3 and 3:1.
The dispersant(s) may thus have a silicone backbone, such as silicone polyether and dispersants of amino silicone type. Among the suitable dispersants that may be mentioned are: - amino silicones, i.e. silicones comprising one or more amino groups such as those sold under the names and references: BYK LPX 21879 by BYK, GP-4, GP-6, GP-344, GP-851, GP-965, GP-967 and GP-988-1, sold by Genesee Polymers,
- silicone acrylates such as Tego® RC 902, Tego® RC 922, Tego® RC 1041, and Tego® RC 1043, sold by Evonik,
- polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS) silicones bearing carboxyl groups such as X-22162 and X-22370 by Shin-Etsu, epoxy silicones such as GP-29, GP-32, GP-502, GP-504, GP-514, GP-607, GP-682, and GP-695 by Genesee Polymers, or Tego® RC 1401, Tego® RC 1403, Tego® RC 1412 by Evonik.
According to one a particular embodiment, the dispersant(s) are of amino silicone type and are cationic.
Preferably, the pigment(s) are chosen from mineral, mixed mineral-organic or organic pigments.
In one variant of the invention, the pigment(s) are organic pigments, preferentially organic pigments surface-treated with an organic agent chosen from silicone compounds. In another variant of the invention, the pigment(s) are mineral pigments.
Direct dye
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may comprise one or more direct dyes.
The term “direct dye” means natural and/or synthetic dyes, other than oxidation dyes. These are dyes that will spread superficially on the fiber.
They may be ionic or nonionic, preferably cationic or nonionic.
Examples of suitable direct dyes that may be mentioned include azo direct dyes; (poly)methine dyes such as cyanines, hemicyanines and styryls; carbonyl dyes; azine dyes; nitro(hetero)aryl dyes; tri(hetero)arylmethane dyes; porphyrin dyes; phthalocyanine dyes and natural direct dyes, alone or in the form of mixtures.
The direct dyes are preferably cationic direct dyes. Mention may be made of the hydrazono cationic dyes of formulae (XIII) and (XIV) and the azo cationic dyes
(XV) and (XVI) below:
Figure imgf000028_0001
Ar+-N=N-Ar”, Q-
(XVI), in which formulae (XIII) to (XVI):
- Het+ represents a cationic heteroaryl radical, preferentially bearing an endocyclic cationic charge, such as imidazolium, indolium or pyridinium, which is optionally substituted, preferentially with at least one (Ci-Cs) alkyl group such as methyl;
- Ar+ represents an aryl radical, such as phenyl or naphthyl, bearing an exocyclic cationic charge, preferentially ammonium, particularly tri(Ci- C8)alkylammonium, such as trimethylammonium;
- Ar represents an aryl group, notably phenyl, which is optionally substituted, preferentially with one or more electron-donating groups such as i) optionally substituted (Ci-C8)alkyl, ii) optionally substituted (Ci-C8)alkoxy, iii) (di)(Ci- C8)(alkyl)amino optionally substituted on the alkyl group(s) with a hydroxyl group, iv) aryl(Ci-C8)alkylamino, v) optionally substituted N-(Ci-C8)alkyl-N-aryl(Ci- C8)alkylamino or alternatively Ar represents a julolidine group;
- Ar” represents an optionally substituted (hetero)aryl group, such as phenyl or pyrazolyl, which are optionally substituted, preferentially with one or more (Ci- C8)alkyl, hydroxyl, (di)(Ci-C8)(alkyl)amino, (Ci-C8)alkoxy or phenyl groups;
- Ra and Rb, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a (Ci-C8)alkyl group, which is optionally substituted, preferentially with a hydroxyl group; or else the substituent Ra with a substituent of Het+ and/or Rb with a substituent of Ar form, together with the atoms that bear them, a (hetero)cycloalkyl; in particular, Ra and Rb represent a hydrogen atom or a (Ci-C4)alkyl group optionally substituted with a hydroxyl group;
- Q- represents an organic or mineral anionic counterion, such as a halide or an alkyl sulfate.
In particular, mention may be made of the azo and hydrazono direct dyes bearing an endocyclic cationic charge of formulae (XIII) to (XVI) as defined previously, more particularly, the cationic direct dyes bearing an endocyclic cationic charge described in patent applications WO 95/15144, WO 95/01772 and EP 714954, preferentially the following direct dyes:
Figure imgf000030_0001
(XVIII), in which formulae (XVII) and (XVIII): - R1 represents a (Ci-C4)alkyl group such as methyl;
- R2 and R3, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a (Ci-C4)alkyl group, such as methyl; and
- R4 represents a hydrogen atom or an electron-donating group such as optionally substituted (Ci-C8)alkyl, optionally substituted (Ci-Cs)alkoxy, or (di)(Ci- C8)(alkyl)amino optionally substituted on the alkyl group(s) with a hydroxyl group; in particular, R4 is a hydrogen atom;
- Z represents a CH group or a nitrogen atom, preferentially CH,
- Q- is an anionic counterion as defined previously, in particular a halide, such as chloride, or an alkyl sulfate, such as methyl sulfate or mesyl. In particular, the dyes of formulae (XV) and (XVI) are chosen from Basic Red
51, Basic Yellow 87 and Basic Orange 31 or derivatives thereof with Q’ being an anionic counterion as defined previously, particularly a halide such as chloride, or an alkyl sulfate such as methyl sulfate or mesyl.
The direct dyes may be chosen from anionic direct dyes. The anionic direct dyes of the invention are dyes commonly referred to as “acid” direct dyes owing to their affinity for alkaline substances. The term “anionic direct dye” means any direct dye including in its structure at least one CO2R or SO3R substituent with R denoting a hydrogen atom or a cation originating from a metal or an amine, or an ammonium ion. The anionic dyes may be chosen from direct nitro acid dyes, azo acid dyes, azine acid dyes, triarylmethane acid dyes, indoamine acid dyes, anthraquinone acid dyes, indigoid dyes and natural acid dyes. As acid dyes that are useful for the invention, mention may be made of the dyes of formulae (XIX), (XIX’), (XX), (XX’), (XXI), (XXI’), (CCP), (CCIG), (XXIII), (XXIV), (XXV) and (XXVI) below: a) the diaryl anionic azo dyes of formula (XIX) or (XIX’):
Figure imgf000031_0001
(XIX’), in which formulae (XIX) and (XIX’):
- If?, R-8, If?, RIO, R’7, R’S, R’ 9 and R’IO, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
- alkyl;
- alkoxy, alkylthio; - hydroxyl, mercapto;
- nitro, nitroso;
- R°-C(X)-X’-, R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R° representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or aryl group; X, X’ and X”, which may be identical or different, representing an oxygen or sulfur atom, or NR with R representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
- (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion;
- (O)CO -, M+ with M+ as defined previously; - R”-S(0)2-, with R” representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl, aryl, (di)(alkyl)amino or aryl(alkyl)amino group; preferentially a phenylamino or phenyl group;
- R,”-S(0)2-X’- with R’” representing an optionally substituted alkyl or aryl group, X’ as defined previously;
- (di)(alkyl)amino;
- aryl(alkyl)amino optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from i) nitro; ii) nitroso; iii) (0)2S(0 )-, M+ and iv) alkoxy with M+ as defined previously;
- optionally substituted heteroaryl; preferentially a benzothiazolyl group;
- cycloalkyl, notably cyclohexyl;
- Ar-N=N- with Ar representing an optionally substituted aryl group; preferentially a phenyl optionally substituted with one or more alkyl, (0)2S(0 )-, M+ or phenylamino groups;
- or alternatively two contiguous groups R7 with Rx or Rx with R9 or R9 with Rio together form a fused benzo group A’; and R’7 with R’x or R’x with R’9 or R’9 with R’ 10 together form a fused benzo group B’; with A’ and B’ optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from i) nitro; ii) nitroso; iii) (0)2S(0 )-, M+; iv) hydroxyl; v) mercapto; vi) (di)(alkyl)amino; vii) R°-C(X)-X’-; viii) R°-X’-C(X)-; ix) R°-X’- C(X)-X”-; x) Ar-N=N- and xi) optionally substituted aryl(alkyl)amino; with M+, R°, X, X’, X” and Ar as defined previously;
- W represents a sigma bond s, an oxygen or sulfur atom, or a divalent radical i) -NR- with R as defined previously, or ii) methylene -C(Ra)(Rb)- with Ra and Rb, which may be identical or different, representing a hydrogen atom or an aryl group, or alternatively Ra and Rb form, together with the carbon atom that bears them, a spiro cycloalkyl; preferentially, W represents a sulfur atom or Ra and Rb together form a cyclohexyl; it being understood that formulae (XIX) and (XIX’) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M+ or one carboxylate radical (O)CO -, M+ on one of the rings A, A’, B, B’ or C; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XIX), mention may be made of: Acid Red 1, Acid Red 4, Acid Red 13, Acid Red 14, Acid Red 18, Acid Red 27, Acid Red 28, Acid Red 32, Acid Red 33, Acid Red 35, Acid Red 37, Acid Red 40, Acid Red 41, Acid Red 42, Acid Red 44, Pigment Red 57, Acid Red 68, Acid Red 73, Acid Red 135, Acid Red 138, Acid Red 184, Food Red 1, Food Red 13, Acid Orange 6, Acid Orange 7, Acid Orange 10, Acid Orange 19, Acid Orange 20, Acid Orange 24, Yellow 6, Acid Yellow 9, Acid Yellow 36, Acid Yellow 199, Food Yellow 3, Acid Violet 7, Acid Violet 14, Acid Blue 113, Acid Blue 117, Acid Black 1, Acid Brown 4, Acid Brown 20, Acid Black 26, Acid Black 52, Food Black 1, Food Black 2, Food Yellow 3 or Sunset Yellow; and, as examples of dyes of formula (XIX’), mention may be made of: Acid Red 111, Acid Red 134, Acid Yellow 38; b) the pyrazolone anionic azo dyes of formulae (XX) and (XX’):
Figure imgf000033_0001
in which formulae (XX) and (XX’ ):
- Rn, Ri2 and Ri3, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, an alkyl group or -(0)2S(0 ), M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a group -C(0)0 , M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- Ri5 represents a hydrogen atom;
- Ri6 represents an oxo group, in which case R’i6 is absent, or alternatively Ri5 with Ri6 together form a double bond;
- Ri7 and Rix, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom, or a group chosen from: - (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- Ar-0-S(0)2- with Ar representing an optionally substituted aryl group; preferentially a phenyl optionally substituted with one or more alkyl groups;
- Ri9 and R20 together form either a double bond, or a benzo group D’, which is optionally substituted;
- R’ i6, R’ 19 and R’20, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or hydroxyl group;
- R21 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or alkoxy group;
- Ra and Rb, which may be identical or different, are as defined previously; preferentially, Ra represents a hydrogen atom and Rb represents an aryl group;
- Y represents either a hydroxyl group or an oxo group;
- — — ~ represents a single bond when Y is an oxo group; and represents a double bond when Y represents a hydroxyl group; it being understood that formulae (XX) and (XX’) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M+ or one carboxylate radical -C(0)0 , M+ on one of the rings D or E; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XX), mention may be made of: Acid Red 195, Acid Yellow 23, Acid Yellow 27, Acid Yellow 76, and as examples of dyes of formula (XX’), mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 17; c) the anthraquinone dyes of formulae (XXI) and (CCG):
Figure imgf000034_0001
(XXI),
Figure imgf000035_0001
(CCG), in which formulae (XXI) and (CCG):
- R22, R23, R24, R25, R26 and R27, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a group chosen from: - alkyl;
- hydroxyl, mercapto;
- alkoxy, alkylthio;
- optionally substituted aryloxy or arylthio, preferentially substituted with one or more groups chosen from alkyl and (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ as defined previously; - aryl(alkyl)amino optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from alkyl and (0)2S(0-)-, M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- (di)(alkyl)amino;
- (di)(hydroxyalkyl)amino;
- (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ as defined previously; - Z’ represents a hydrogen atom or a group NR28R29 with R28 and R29, which may be identical or different, representing a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
- alkyl;
- polyhydroxy alkyl such as hydroxy ethyl;
- aryl optionally substituted with one or more groups, particularly i) alkyl such as methyl, n-dodecyl, n-butyl; ii) (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ as defined previously; iii)
R°-C (X)-X’-, R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R°, X, X’ and X” as defined previously, preferentially R° represents an alkyl group;
- cycloalkyl; notably cyclohexyl; - Z represents a group chosen from hydroxyl and NR’28R’29 with R’28 and R529, which may be identical or different, representing the same atoms or groups as R28 and R29 as defined previously; it being understood that formulae (XXI) and (CCG) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M+ or one carboxylate radical C(0)0 , M+; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XXI), mention may be made of: Acid Blue 25, Acid Blue 43, Acid Blue 62, Acid Blue 78, Acid Blue 129, Acid Blue 138, Acid Blue 140, Acid Blue 251, Acid Green 25, Acid Green 41, Acid Violet 42, Acid Violet 43, Mordant Red 3; EXT Violet No. 2; and, as an example of a dye of formula (CCG), mention may be made of: Acid Black 48. d) the nitro dyes of formulae (XXII) and (CCIG):
Figure imgf000036_0001
(CCIG), in which formulae (XII) and (CIG):
- USD, RSI and R32, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a group chosen from:
- alkyl;
- alkoxy optionally substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups, alkylthio optionally substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups; - hydroxyl, mercapto;
- nitro, nitroso;
- polyhaloalkyl;
- R°-C(X)-X\ R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R°, X, X’ and X” as defined previously;
- (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- (O)CO -, M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- (di)(alkyl)amino;
- (di)(hydroxyalkyl)amino;
- heterocycloalkyl such as piperidino, piperazino or morpholino; in particular, R30, R31 and R32 represent a hydrogen atom;
- Rc and Rd, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
- W is as defined previously; W particularly represents an -NH- group;
- ALK represents a linear or branched divalent C1-C6 alkylene group; in particular, ALK represents a -CH2-CH2- group;
- n is 1 or 2;
- p represents an integer inclusively between 1 and 5;
- q represents an integer inclusively between 1 and 4;
- u is 0 or 1;
- when n is 1, J represents a nitro or nitroso group; particularly nitro;
- when n is 2, J represents an oxygen or sulfur atom, or a divalent radical -S(0)m- with m representing an integer 1 or 2; preferentially, J represents an -SO2- radical;
- M’ represents a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion;
Figure imgf000037_0001
, which may be present or absent, represents a benzo group optionally substituted with one or more groups R30 as defined previously; it being understood that formulae (XXII) and (CCIG) comprise at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M+ or one carboxylate radical C(0)0 , M+; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XXII), mention may be made of: Acid Brown 13 and Acid Orange 3; as examples of dyes of formula (CCIG), mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 1, the sodium salt of 2,4-dinitro-l-naphthol-7-sulfonic acid, 2-piperidino-5-nitrobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-(4’-N,N-(2”-hydroxyethyl)amino-2’- nitro)anilineethanesulfonic acid, 4-P-hydroxyethylamino-3-nitrobenzenesul fonic acid; EXT D&C Yellow 7; e) the triarylmethane dyes of formula (XXIII):
Figure imgf000038_0001
(XXIII), in which formula (XXIII):
- R33, R34, R35 and R36, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted arylalkyl; particularly an alkyl and benzyl group optionally substituted with a group (O)mS(O')-, M+ with M+ and m as defined previously;
- R37, R38, R39, R40, R41, R42, R43 and R44, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
- alkyl; - alkoxy, alkylthio;
- (di)(alkyl)amino;
- hydroxyl, mercapto;
- nitro, nitroso;
- R°-C(X)-X\ R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R° representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or aryl group; X, X’ and X”, which may be identical or different, representing an oxygen or sulfur atom, or NR with R representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
- (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion; - (O)CO -, M+ with M+ as defined previously;
- or alternatively two contiguous groups R41 with R42 or R42 with R43 or R43 with R44 together form a fused benzo group: G; with G optionally substituted with one or more groups chosen from i) nitro; ii) nitroso; iii) (0)2S(0 )-, M+; iv) hydroxyl; v) mercapto; vi) (di)(alkyl)amino; vii) R°-C(X)-X’-; viii) R°-X’-C(X)- and ix) R°-X’- C(X)-X”-; with M+, R°, X, X’ and X” as defined previously; in particular, R37 to R40 represent a hydrogen atom, and R41 to R44, which may be identical or different, represent a hydroxyl group or (0)2S(0 )-, M+; and when R43 with R44 together form a benzo group, it is preferentially substituted with an (0)2 S(O )- group; it being understood that at least one of the rings G, H, I or G comprises at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )- or one carboxylate radical -C(0)0 ; preferentially sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XXIII), mention may be made of: Acid Blue 1; Acid Blue 3; Acid Blue 7, Acid Blue 9; Acid Violet 49; Acid Green 3; Acid Green 5 and Acid Green 50. f) the xanthene-based dyes of formula (XXIV):
Figure imgf000039_0001
in which formula (XXIV):
- R45, R46, R47 and R48, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom;
- R49, R50, R51 and R52, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a group chosen from:
- alkyl;
- alkoxy, alkylthio;
- hydroxyl, mercapto;
- nitro, nitroso; - (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion;
- (O)CO -, M+ with M+ as defined previously; particularly, R49, R50, Rsi and R52 represent a hydrogen or halogen atom; - G represents an oxygen or sulfur atom or a group NRe with Re as defined previously; particularly, G represents an oxygen atom;
- L represents an alkoxide O , M+; a thioalkoxide S , M+ or a group NRf, with Rf representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and M+ as defined previously; M+ is particularly sodium or potassium; - L’ represents an oxygen or sulfur atom or an ammonium group: N+RfRg, with Rf and Rg, which may be identical or different, representing a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl or aryl group; L’ particularly represents an oxygen atom or a phenylamino group optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or (O)mS(O')-, M+ groups with m and M+ as defined previously; - Q and Q’, which may be identical or different, represent an oxygen or sulfur atom; particularly, Q and Q’ represent an oxygen atom;
- M+ is as defined previously.
As examples of dyes of formula (XXIV), mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 73; Acid Red 51; Acid Red 52; Acid Red 87; Acid Red 92; Acid Red 95; Acid Violet 9. g) the indole-based dyes of formula (XXV):
Figure imgf000040_0001
(XXV), in which formula (XXV):
- R53, R54, R55, R56, R57, R58, R59 and R60, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group chosen from:
- alkyl;
- alkoxy, alkylthio; - hydroxyl, mercapto;
- nitro, nitroso;
- R°-C(X)-X\ R°-X’-C(X)-, R°-X’-C(X)-X”- with R° representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or aryl group; X, X’ and X”, which may be identical or different, representing an oxygen or sulfur atom, or NR with R representing a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
- (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion;
- (O)CO -, M+ with M+ as defined previously; - G represents an oxygen or sulfur atom or a group NRe with Re as defined previously; particularly, G represents an oxygen atom;
- Ri and Rh, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group; it being understood that formula (XXV) comprises at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0 )-, M+ or one carboxylate radical -C(0)0 , M+; preferentially sodium sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XXV), mention may be made of: Acid Blue 74; h) the quinoline-based dyes of formula (XXVI):
Figure imgf000041_0001
in which formula (XXVI):
- R61 represents a hydrogen or halogen atom or an alkyl group; - R62, R63 and R64, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom or a group (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion; or alternatively R.6i with R.62, or R.6i with R.64, together form a benzo group optionally substituted with one or more groups (0)2S(0 )-, M+ with M+ representing a hydrogen atom or a cationic counterion; it being understood that formula (XXVI) comprises at least one sulfonate radical (0)2S(0-)-, M+, preferentially sodium sulfonate.
As examples of dyes of formula (XXVI), mention may be made of: Acid Yellow 2, Acid Yellow 3 and Acid Yellow 5.
Among the natural direct dyes that may be used according to the invention, mention may be made of lawsone, juglone, alizarin, purpurin, carminic acid, kermesic acid, purpurogallin, protocatechaldehyde, indigo, isatin, curcumin, spinulosin, apigenidin and orceins. Use may also be made of extracts or decoctions containing these natural dyes and notably henna-based poultices or extracts.
Preferably, the direct dyes are chosen from anionic direct dyes.
The colouring agent(s) may be present in a total content ranging from 0.001% to 20% by weight and preferably from 0.005% to 15% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition, preferably, the colouring agent(s) are chosen from pigments.
The pigment(s) may be present in a total content ranging from 0.05% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 15% by weight and better still from 0.5% to 10% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
The direct dye(s) may be present in a total content ranging from 0.001% to 10% by weight relative to the total weight of the composition, preferably from 0.005% to 5% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
Non-carboxylic anionic thickener
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one non-carboxylic anionic thickener.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “non-carboxylic agent” means an agent which does not comprise any carboxylic acid functions (-COOH) or carboxylate functions (-COO ).
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “thickener” means a compound which increases the viscosity of a composition into which it is introduced to a concentration of 0.05% by weight relative to the total weight of the composition, by at least 20 cps, preferably by at least 50 cps, at room temperature (25°C), at atmospheric pressure and at a shear rate of 1 s 1 (the viscosity may be measured using a cone/plate viscometer, a Haake R600 rheometer or the like).
Preferably, the non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) are chosen from non- carboxylic anionic polymers, more preferentially from anionic polymers bearing (a) sulfonic group(s).
For the purposes of the invention, the term “anionic polymer” means a polymer comprising one or more anionic or anionizable groups, and not comprising any cationic or cationizable groups.
Advantageously, the non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) are chosen from anionic polymers including at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer bearing a sulfonic group, in free form or partially or totally neutralized form.
These polymers may be crosslinked or non-crosslinked. They are preferably crosslinked.
These polymers may be associative or non-associative, preferably non- associative.
It is recalled that “associative polymers” are polymers that are capable, in an aqueous medium, of reversibly associating with each other or with other molecules.
Their chemical structure more particularly comprises at least one hydrophilic zone and at least one hydrophobic zone.
The term “hydrophobic group” means a radical or polymer with a saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched hydrocarbon-based chain, comprising at least 8 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, in particular from 12 to 30 carbon atoms and more preferentially from 18 to 30 carbon atoms.
Preferentially, the hydrocarbon-based group is derived from a monofunctional compound. By way of example, the hydrophobic group may be derived from a fatty alcohol such as stearyl alcohol, dodecyl alcohol or decyl alcohol. It may also denote a hydrocarbon-based polymer, for instance polybutadiene.
The ethylenically unsaturated monomers bearing a sulfonic group are notably chosen from vinylsulfonic acid, styrenesulfonic acid, (meth)acrylamido(Ci- C22)alkylsulfonic acids, N-(Ci-C22)alkyl(meth)acrylamido(Ci-C22)alkylsulfonic acids such as undecylacrylamidomethanesulfonic acid, and also partially or totally neutralized forms thereof.
(Meth)acrylamido(Ci-C22)alkylsulfonic acids, for instance acrylamidomethanesulfonic acid, acrylamidoethanesulfonic acid, acrylamidopropanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, methacrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-n-butanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2,4,4-trimethylpentanesulfonic acid, 2-methacrylamidododecylsulfonic acid or 2-acrylamido-2,6-dimethyl-3-heptanesulfonic acid, and also partially or totally neutralized forms thereof, will more preferentially be used.
2-Acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid (AMPS), and also partially or totally neutralized forms thereof, will more particularly be used.
Among the 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid copolymers, mention may be made of partially or totally neutralized crosslinked copolymers of 2- acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid and of acrylamide; mention may be made in particular of the product described in Example 1 of EP 503 853, and reference may be made to said document as regards these polymers.
Mention may also be made of copolymers of 2-acrylamido-2- methylpropanesulfonic acid or salts thereof and of hydroxyethyl acrylate, such as the compound sold under the name Sepinov EMT 10 by the company SEPPIC (ESICI name: hydroxyethylacrylate/sodium acryloyldimethyl taurate copolymer).
The associative AMPS polymers may notably be chosen from statistical associative AMPS polymers modified by reaction with a Ce-Cn n-monoalkylamine or di-n-alkylamine, and such as those described in patent application WO 00/31154 (forming an integral part of the content of the description). These polymers may also contain other ethylenically unsaturated hydrophilic monomers chosen, for example, from (meth)acrylic acid derivatives, such as esters thereof obtained with monoalcohols or mono- or polyalkylene glycols, (meth)acrylamides, vinylpyrrolidone, or mixtures of these compounds.
The preferred polymers of this family are chosen from associative copolymers of AMPS and of at least one ethylenically unsaturated hydrophobic monomer.
These same copolymers may also contain one or more ethylenically unsaturated monomers not including a fatty chain, such as (meth)acrylic acid derivatives, notably esters thereof obtained with monoalcohols or mono- or polyalkylene glycols, (meth)acrylamides, vinylpyrrolidone, or mixtures of these compounds.
These copolymers are notably described in patent application EP-A 750 899, patent EiS 5 089 578 and in the following publications from Yotaro Morishima:
- Self-assembling amphiphilic polyelectrolytes and their nanostructures, Chinese Journal of Polymer Science , Vol. 18, No. 40, (2000), 323-336; - Micelle formation of random copolymers of sodium 2-(acrylamido)-2- methylpropanesulfonate and a nonionic surfactant macromonomer in water as studied by fluorescence and dynamic light scattering, Macromolecules , Vol. 33, No. 10, (2000), 3694-3704;
- Solution properties of micelle networks formed by non-ionic moieties covalently bound to an polyelectrolyte: salt effects on rheological behavior - Langmuir , Vol. 16, No. 12, (2000) 5324-5332;
- Stimuli responsive amphiphilic copolymers of sodium 2-(acrylamido)-2- methylpropanesulfonate and associative macromonomers - Polym. Preprint, Div. Polym. Chem. 40(2), (1999), 220-221.
Among these polymers, mention may be made of:
- crosslinked or non-crosslinked, neutralized or non-neutralized copolymers, including from 15% to 60% by weight of AMPS units and from 40% to 85% by weight of (C8-Ci6)alkyl(meth)acrylamide or (C8-Ci6)alkyl(meth)acrylate units relative to the polymer, such as those described in patent application EP-A750 899;
- terpolymers including from 10 mol% to 90 mol% of acrylamide units, from 0.1 mol% to 10 mol% of AMPS units and from 5 mol% to 80 mol% of n-(C6- Ci8)alkylacrylamide units, such as those described in patent US-5 089 578.
Mention may also be made of copolymers of totally neutralized AMPS and of dodecyl methacrylate, and also crosslinked and non-crosslinked copolymers of AMPS and of n-dodecylmethacrylamide, such as those described in the Morishima articles mentioned above.
Preferably, the non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) are chosen from sodium 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonate/hydroxy ethyl acrylate copolymer, sold by the company SEPPIC (INCI name hydroxy ethyl acrylate/sodium acryloyldimethyl taurate copolymer).
Advantageously, the total amount of the non-carboxylic anionic thickener(s) ranges from 0.01% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 10% by weight, better still from 0.1% to 5% by weight, and even better still from 0.1% to 2% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
Silicone
The hair colouring composition may also comprise at least one silicone.
The silicone(s) are different from the compound(s) containing at least one carboxylic acid group as defined hereinbelow. Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises at least one silicone chosen from non-amino silicones, amino silicones and mixtures thereof.
The silicones may be solid or liquid at 25°C and atmospheric pressure (1.013xl05 Pa), and volatile or non-volatile.
The silicones that may be used may be soluble or insoluble in the composition according to the invention; they may be in the form of oil, wax, resin or gum; silicone oils are preferred.
Silicones are notably described in detail in Walter Noll’s Chemistry and Technology of Silicones (1968), Academic Press.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition contains one or more silicones that are liquid at 25°C and atmospheric pressure (1.013><105 Pa).
The volatile silicones may be chosen from those with a boiling point of between 60°C and 260°C (at atmospheric pressure) and more particularly from: i) cyclic polydialkylsiloxanes including from 3 to 7 and preferably 4 to 5 silicon atoms, such as
- octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and decamethylcyclopentasiloxane.
Mention may be made of the products sold under the name Volatile Silicone
7207 by Union Carbide or Silbione 70045 V 2 by Rhodia, Volatile Silicone 7158 by Union Carbide or Silbione 70045 V 5 by Rhodia;
- cyclocopolymers of the dimethylsiloxane/methylalkylsiloxane type having the chemical structure: * *
Figure imgf000046_0001
Preferably cyclomethylsiloxane.
Mention may be made of Volatile Silicone FZ 3109 sold by the company Union Carbide.
- mixtures of cyclic silicones with silicon-based organic compounds, such as the mixture of octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and of tetratrimethylsilylpentaerythritol (50/50) and the mixture of octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and of oxy-1,1’- bis(2,2,2,,2,,3,3,-hexatrimethylsilyloxy)neopentane; ii) linear polydialkylsiloxanes containing 2 to 9 silicon atoms, which generally have a viscosity of less than or equal to 5 c 106 m2/s at 25°C, such as decamethyltetrasiloxane.
Other silicones belonging to this category are described in the article published in Cosmetics and Toiletries, Vol. 91, Jan. 76, pages 27-32 - Todd & Byers Volatile silicone fluids for cosmetics ; mention may be made of the product sold under the name SH 200 by the company Toray Silicone.
Among the non-volatile silicones, mention may be made, alone or as a mixture, of polydialkylsiloxanes and notably polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS), polydiarylsiloxanes, polyalkylarylsiloxanes, silicone gums and resins, and also organopolysiloxanes (or organomodified polysiloxanes, or alternatively organomodified silicones) which are polysiloxanes including in their structure one or more organofunctional groups, generally attached via a hydrocarbon-based group, and preferably chosen from aryl groups, amine groups, alkoxy groups and polyoxyethylene or polyoxypropylene groups. Preferably, the non-volatile silicones are chosen from polydimethyl/methylsiloxanes which are optionally oxyethylenated and oxypropylenated.
The organomodified silicones may be polydiarylsiloxanes, notably polydiphenylsiloxanes, and polyalkylarylsiloxanes functionalized with the organofunctional groups mentioned previously. The polyalkylarylsiloxanes are particularly chosen from linear and/or branched polydimethyl/methylphenylsiloxanes and polydimethyl/diphenylsiloxanes.
Among the organomodified silicones, mention may be made of organopolysiloxanes including:
- polyoxyethylene and/or polyoxypropylene groups optionally including C6- C24 alkyl groups, such as dimethicone copolyols, and notably those sold by the company Dow Corning under the name DC 1248 or the oils Silwet® L 722, L 7500, L 77 and L 711 from the company Union Carbide; or alternatively (C12)alkylmethicone copolyols, and notably those sold by the company Dow Corning under the name Q2- 5200;
- substituted or unsubstituted amine groups, in particular C1-C4 aminoalkyl groups; mention may be made of the products sold under the name GP4 Silicone Fluid and GP7100 by the company Genesee, or under the names Q2-8220 and DC929 or DC939 by the company Dow Coming; - thiol groups, such as the products sold under the names GP 72 A and GP 71 from Genesee;
- alkoxylated groups, such as the product sold under the name Silicone Copolymer F-755 by SWS Silicones and Abil Wax® 2428, 2434 and 2440 by the company Goldschmidt;
- hydroxylated groups, for instance polyorganosiloxanes bearing a hydroxyalkyl function;
- acyloxyalkyl groups, such as the polyorganosiloxanes described in patent US-A-4 957 732;
- anionic groups of the carboxylic acid type, as described, for example, in EP 186 507, or of the alkylcarboxylic type, such as the product X-22-3701E from the company Shin-Etsu; or alternatively of the 2-hydroxy alkyl sulfonate or 2- hydroxyalkylthiosulfate type, such as the products sold by the company Goldschmidt under the names Abil® S201 and Abil® S255;
- hydroxyacylamino groups, such as the polyorganosiloxanes described in patent application EP 342 834; mention may be made, for example, of the product Q2- 8413 from the company Dow Corning.
The silicones may also be chosen from polydialkylsiloxanes, among which mention may be made mainly of polydimethylsiloxanes bearing trimethyl silyl end groups. Among these polydialkylsiloxanes, mention may be made of the following commercial products:
- the Silbione® oils of the 47 and 70 047 series or the Mirasil® oils sold by Rhodia, for instance the oil 70 047 V 500 000;
- the oils of the Mirasil® series sold by the company Rhodia;
- the oils of the 200 series from the company Dow Corning, such as DC200, with a viscosity of 60 000 mm2/s;
- the Viscasil® oils from General Electric and certain oils of the SF series (SF 96, SF 18) from General Electric.
Mention may also be made of polydimethylsiloxanes bearing dimethylsilanol end groups, known under the name dimethiconol (CTFA), such as the oils of the 48 series from the company Rhodia.
In this category of polydialkylsiloxanes, mention may also be made of the products sold under the names Abil Wax® 9800 and 9801 by the company Goldschmidt, which are poly(Cl-C20)dialkylsiloxanes. Products that may be used more particularly in accordance with the invention are mixtures such as:
- mixtures formed from a polydimethylsiloxane with a hydroxy-terminated chain, or dimethiconol (CTFA), and from a cyclic polydimethylsiloxane, also known as cyclomethicone (CTFA), such as the product Q2-1401 sold by the company Dow Corning,
- mixtures formed from a polydimethylsiloxane with a hydroxy-terminated chain, or dimethiconol (CTFA), and from a polydimethylsiloxane, also known as dimethicone (CTFA), such as the product Xiameter® PMX-1503 Fluid sold by the company Dow Coming.
The polyalkylarylsiloxanes are particularly chosen from linear and/or branched polydimethyl/methylphenylsiloxanes and polydimethyl/diphenylsiloxanes with a viscosity ranging from 1 x 105 to 5x 102 m2/s at 25°C.
Among these polyalkylarylsiloxanes, mention may be made of the products sold under the following names:
- the Silbione® oils of the 70 641 series from Rhodia;
- the oils of the Rhodorsil® 70633 and 763 series from Rhodia;
- the oil Dow Coming 556 Cosmetic Grade Fluid from Dow Corning;
- the silicones of the PK series from Bayer, such as the product PK20;
- the silicones of the PN and PH series from Bayer, such as the products PN1000 and PHI 000;
- certain oils of the SF series from General Electric, such as SF 1023, SF 1154, SF 1250 and SF 1265.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises at least one amino silicone. The term “ amino silicone ” denotes any silicone including at least one primary, secondary or tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium group.
The weight-average molecular masses of these amino silicones may be measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) at room temperature (25°C), as polystyrene equivalent. The columns used are m styragel columns. The eluent is THF and the flow rate is 1 ml/min. 200 mΐ of a 0.5% by weight solution of silicone in THF are injected. Detection is performed by refractometry and UV-metry.
Preferably, the amino silicone(s) that may be used in the context of the invention are chosen from: a) the polysiloxanes corresponding to formula (A):
Figure imgf000050_0001
in which x’ and y’ are integers such that the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) is between 5000 and 500 000 approximately; b) the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B): R’aG3-a-Si(0SiG2)n-(0SiGbR’2-b)m-0-SiG3-a-R’a (B) in which:
- G, which may be identical or different, denotes a hydrogen atom or a group from among phenyl, OH, Ci-Cs alkyl, for example methyl, or C i-Cx alkoxy, for example methoxy,
- a, which may be identical or different, denotes 0 or an integer from 1 to 3, in particular 0,
- b denotes 0 or 1, in particular 1,
- m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10,
- R’, which may be identical or different, denotes a monovalent radical of formula -CqH2qL in which q is a number ranging from 2 to 8 and L is an optionally quaternized amine group chosen from the following groups: -N(R”)2; -N+(R”)3 A-; - NR”-Q-N(R”)2 and -NR”-Q-N+(R”)3 A-, in which R”, which may be identical or different, denotes hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl, or a saturated monovalent hydrocarbon- based radical, for example a C1-C20 alkyl radical; Q denotes a linear or branched group of formula CrFEr, r being an integer ranging from 2 to 6, preferably from 2 to 4; and A- represents a cosmetically acceptable anion, notably a halide anion such as fluoride, chloride, bromide or iodide.
Preferably, the amino silicone(s) are chosen from the amino silicones of formula (B). Preferably, the amino silicones of formula (B) are chosen from the amino silicones corresponding to formulae (C), (D), (E), (F) and/or (G) below. According to a first embodiment, the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones known as “trimethyl silyl amodimethicone” corresponding to formula (C):
Figure imgf000051_0001
in which m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10.
According to a second embodiment, the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (D) below:
Figure imgf000051_0002
in which:
- m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 1000, in particular from 50 to 250 and more particularly from 100 to 200; n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 999, notably from 49 to 249 and more particularly from 125 to 175, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 1000, notably from 1 to 10 and more particularly from 1 to 5;
- Ri, R2 and R3, which may be identical or different, represent a hydroxyl or C1-C4 alkoxy radical, at least one of the radicals Ri to R3 denoting an alkoxy radical. Preferably, the alkoxy radical is a methoxy radical.
The hydroxy/alkoxy mole ratio preferably ranges from 0.2: 1 to 0.4: 1 and preferably from 0.25: 1 to 0.35: 1 and more particularly is equal to 0.3: 1. The weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of these silicones preferably ranges from 2000 to 1 000000 and more particularly from 3500 to 200 000.
According to a third embodiment, the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (E) below:
Figure imgf000052_0001
in which:
- p and q are numbers such that the sum (p + q) ranges from 1 to 1000, in particular from 50 to 350 and more particularly from 150 to 250; p possibly denoting a number from 0 to 999 and notably from 49 to 349 and more particularly from 159 to 239, and q possibly denoting a number from 1 to 1000, notably from 1 to 10 and more particularly from 1 to 5;
- Ri and R2, which are different, represent a hydroxyl or C1-C4 alkoxy radical, at least one of the radicals Ri or R2 denoting an alkoxy radical.
Preferably, the alkoxy radical is a methoxy radical.
The hydroxy/alkoxy mole ratio generally ranges from 1:0.8 to 1:1.1 and preferably from 1:0.9 to 1:1 and more particularly is equal to 1:0.95.
The weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of the silicone preferably ranges from 2000 to 200 000, even more particularly from 5000 to 100 000 and more particularly from 10000 to 50000.
The commercial products comprising silicones of structure (D) or (E) may include in their composition one or more other amino silicones the structure of which is different from formula (D) or (E).
A product containing amino silicones of structure (D) is sold by the company Wacker under the name Belsil® ADM 652.
A product containing amino silicones of structure (E) is sold by Wacker under the name Fluid WR 1300® or under the name Belsil® ADM LOG 1.
When these amino silicones are used, one particularly advantageous embodiment consists in using them in the form of an oil-in-water emulsion. The oil- in-water emulsion may comprise one or more surfactants. The surfactants may be of any nature but are preferably cationic and/or nonionic. The number-average size of the silicone particles in the emulsion generally ranges from 3 nm to 500 nm. Preferably, notably as amino silicones of formula (E), use is made of microemulsions with a mean particle size ranging from 5 nm to 60 nm (limits included) and more particularly from 10 nm to 50 nm (limits included). Thus, use may be made according to the invention of the amino silicone microemulsions of formula (E) sold under the names Finish CT 96 E® or SLM 28020® by the company Wacker.
According to a fourth embodiment, the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (F) below:
Figure imgf000053_0001
in which:
- m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10;
- A denotes a linear or branched alkylene radical containing from 4 to 8 carbon atoms and preferably 4 carbon atoms. This radical is preferably linear.
The weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of these amino silicones preferably ranges from 2000 to 1 000 000 and even more particularly from 3500 to 200 000.
Another silicone corresponding to formula (B) is, for example, the Xiameter MEM 8299 Emulsion from Dow Coming (ESICI name: amodimethicone and trideceth- 6 and cetrimonium chloride).
According to a fifth embodiment, the amino silicones corresponding to formula (B) are chosen from the silicones of formula (G) below:
Figure imgf000054_0001
in which:
- m and n are numbers such that the sum (n + m) ranges from 1 to 2000 and in particular from 50 to 150, n possibly denoting a number from 0 to 1999 and notably from 49 to 149, and m possibly denoting a number from 1 to 2000 and notably from 1 to 10;
- A denotes a linear or branched alkylene radical containing from 4 to 8 carbon atoms and preferably 4 carbon atoms. This radical is preferably branched.
The weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of these amino silicones preferably ranges from 500 to 1 000000 and even more particularly from 1000 to 200 000.
A silicone corresponding to this formula is, for example, DC2-8566 Amino Fluid from Dow Coming; c) the amino silicones corresponding to formula (H):
Figure imgf000054_0002
in which:
- R? represents a monovalent hydrocarbon-based radical containing from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and in particular a C I -C IX alkyl or C2-C18 alkenyl radical, for example methyl;
- Re represents a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical, notably a C1-C18 alkylene radical or a divalent C1-C18, for example Ci-Cx, alkyleneoxy radical linked to the Si via an SiC bond;
- Q is an anion such as a halide ion, notably chloride, or an organic acid salt, notably acetate; - r represents a mean statistical value ranging from 2 to 20 and in particular from 2 to 8;
- s represents a mean statistical value ranging from 20 to 200 and in particular from 20 to 50.
Such amino silicones are notably described in patent US 4 185 087.
- d) the quaternary ammonium silicones of formula (I):
Figure imgf000055_0001
in which:
- R.7, which may be identical or different, represent a monovalent hydrocarbon-based radical containing from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and in particular a C1-C18 alkyl radical, a C2-C18 alkenyl radical or a ring comprising 5 or 6 carbon atoms, for example methyl;
- R.6 represents a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical, notably a C1-C18 alkylene radical or a divalent C1-C18, for example Ci-Cx, alkyleneoxy radical linked to the Si via an SiC bond;
- R.8, which may be identical or different, represent a hydrogen atom, a monovalent hydrocarbon-based radical having from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and in particular a C1-C18 alkyl radical, a C2-C18 alkenyl radical or a radical -R6-NHCOR7;
- X is an anion such as a halide ion, notably chloride, or an organic acid salt, notably acetate;
- r represents a mean statistical value ranging from 2 to 200 and in particular from 5 to 100.
These silicones are described, for example, in patent application EP-A 0 530
974; e) the amino silicones of formula (J):
Figure imgf000055_0002
in which: - Ri, R2, R3 and R4, which may be identical or different, denote a C1-C4 alkyl radical or a phenyl group,
- R5 denotes a C1-C4 alkyl radical or a hydroxyl group,
- n is an integer ranging from 1 to 5,
- m is an integer ranging from 1 to 5, and
- x is chosen such that the amine number ranges from 0.01 to 1 meq/g; f) multiblock polyoxyalkylene amino silicones, of the type (AB)n, A being a polysiloxane block and B being a polyoxyalkylene block including at least one amine group.
Said silicones are preferably formed from repeating units having the following general formulae:
[-(SiMe20)xSiMe2-R-N(R”)- R,-0(C2H40)a(C3H60)b-R,-N(H)-R-] or alternatively
[-(SiMe20)xSiMe2-R-N(R”)-R,-0(C2H40)a(C3H60)b-] in which:
- a is an integer greater than or equal to 1, preferably ranging from 5 to 200 and more particularly ranging from 10 to 100;
- b is an integer between 0 and 200, preferably ranging from 4 to 100 and more particularly between 5 and 30;
- x is an integer ranging from 1 to 10 000 and more particularly from 10 to
5000;
- R” is a hydrogen atom or a methyl;
- R, which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched divalent C2-C12 hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally including one or more heteroatoms such as oxygen; preferably, R denotes an ethylene radical, a linear or branched propylene radical, a linear or branched butylene radical or a
CH2CH2CH20CH2CH(0H)CH2- radical; preferentially, R denotes a
CH2CH2CH20CH2CH(0H)CH2- radical;
- R’, which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched divalent C2-C12 hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally including one or more heteroatoms such as oxygen; preferably, R’ denotes an ethylene radical, a linear or branched propylene radical, a linear or branched butylene radical or a radical CH2CH2CH20CH2CH(0H)CH2-; preferentially, R’ denotes -CH(CH3)-CH2-.
The siloxane blocks preferably represent between 50 mol% and 95 mol% of the total weight of the silicone, more particularly from 70 mol% to 85 mol%. The amine content is preferably between 0.02 and 0.5 meq/g of copolymer in a 30% solution in dipropylene glycol, more particularly between 0.05 and 0.2.
The weight-average molecular mass (Mw) of the silicone is preferably between 5000 and 1 000 000 and more particularly between 10 000 and 200 000.
Mention may notably be made of the silicones sold under the name Silsoft A- 843 or Silsoft A+ by Momentive. g) and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the amino silicones of formula (B) are chosen from the amino silicones corresponding to formula (E).
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises at least one amino silicone having the INC I name amodimethicone, preferably introduced in the form of an emulsion or microemulsion with surfactants.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises at least one amino silicone having the INCI name amodimethicone as an emulsion or microemulsion with surfactants, having the INCI names trideceth-5 and trideceth-10.
The silicone(s) may be present in a total amount ranging from 0.01% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.05% to 15% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 10% by weight and even more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
The amino silicone(s) may be present in a total amount ranging from 0.01% to 20%, preferably from 0.05% to 15%, more preferentially from 0.1% to 10% and even more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
Associative polymers
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one associative polymer different from the non-carboxylic anionic thickeners described previously.
It is recalled that “associative polymers” are polymers that are capable, in an aqueous medium, of reversibly associating with each other or with other molecules.
Their chemical structure more particularly comprises at least one hydrophilic zone and at least one hydrophobic zone.
The term “ hydrophobic group ” means a radical or polymer with a saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched hydrocarbon-based chain, comprising at least 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, in particular from 12 to 30 carbon atoms and more preferentially from 18 to 30 carbon atoms.
Preferentially, the hydrocarbon-based group is derived from a monofunctional compound. By way of example, the hydrophobic group may be derived from a fatty alcohol such as stearyl alcohol, dodecyl alcohol or decyl alcohol. It may also denote a hydrocarbon-based polymer, for instance polybutadiene.
The associative polymers may be of nonionic, anionic, cationic or amphoteric nature.
Preferably, the associative polymer(s) are chosen from anionic associative polymers.
Among the associative polymers of anionic type that may be mentioned are:
- (a) those including at least one hydrophilic unit and at least one fatty-chain allyl ether unit, more particularly those whose hydrophilic unit is formed by an ethylenic unsaturated anionic monomer, more particularly a vinylcarboxylic acid and most particularly an acrylic acid or a methacrylic acid or mixtures thereof.
Among these anionic associative polymers, the ones that are particularly preferred according to the invention are polymers formed from 20% to 60% by weight of acrylic acid and/or of methacrylic acid, from 5% to 60% by weight of lower alkyl (meth)acrylates, from 2% to 50% by weight of fatty-chain allyl ether, and from 0 to 1% by weight of a crosslinking agent which is a well-known copolymerizable unsaturated polyethylenic monomer, for instance diallyl phthalate, allyl (meth)acrylate, divinylbenzene, (poly)ethylene glycol dimethacrylate or methyl enebi sacry 1 ami de .
Among the latter polymers, those most particularly preferred are crosslinked terpolymers of methacrylic acid, of ethyl acrylate and of polyethylene glycol (10 OE) stearyl alcohol ether (Steareth-10), notably those sold by the company CIBA under the names Salcare SC80® and Salcare SC90®, which are aqueous 30% emulsions of a crosslinked terpolymer of methacrylic acid, of ethyl acrylate and of steareth-10 allyl ether (40/50/10).
- (b) those including i) at least one hydrophilic unit of unsaturated olefmic carboxylic acid type, and ii) at least one hydrophobic unit of the type such as a (C IO CS 0) alkyl ester of an unsaturated carboxylic acid.
(C10-C30) Alkyl esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids that are useful in the invention comprise, for example, lauryl acrylate, stearyl acrylate, decyl acrylate, isodecyl acrylate and dodecyl acrylate, and the corresponding methacrylates, lauryl methacrylate, stearyl methacrylate, decyl methacrylate, isodecyl methacrylate and dodecyl methacrylate.
Anionic polymers of this type are described and prepared, for example, according to patents US 3 915 921 and US 4 509 949.
Among the anionic associative polymers of this type that will be used more particularly are those constituted of from 95% to 60% by weight of acrylic acid (hydrophilic unit), 4% to 40% by weight of C10-C30 alkyl acrylate (hydrophobic unit) and 0 to 6% by weight of crosslinking polymerizable monomer, or alternatively those constituted of from 98% to 96% by weight of acrylic acid (hydrophilic unit), 1% to 4% by weight of C10-C30 alkyl acrylate (hydrophobic unit) and 0.1% to 0.6% by weight of crosslinking polymerizable monomer such as those described previously.
Among said polymers above, the ones most particularly preferred according to the present invention are the products sold by the company Goodrich under the trade names Pemulen TR1®, Pemulen TR2®, Carbopol 1382®, and even more preferentially Pemulen TR1®, and the product sold by the company SEPPIC under the name Coatex SX®.
Mention may also be made of the acrylic acid/lauryl methacrylate/vinylpyrrolidone terpolymer sold under the name Acrylidone LM by the company ISP.
- (c) maleic anhydride/C3o-C38 a-olefm/alkyl maleate terpolymers, such as the product (maleic anhydride/C3o-C38 a-olefm/isopropyl maleate copolymer) sold under the name Performa V 1608® by the company Newphase Technologies.
- (d) acrylic terpolymers comprising: i) about 20% to 70% by weight of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid [A], ii) about 20% to 80% by weight of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated non surfactant monomer other than [A], iii) about 0.5% to 60% by weight of a nonionic monourethane which is the product of reaction of a monohydric surfactant with a monoethylenically unsaturated monoisocyanate, such as those described in patent application EP-A-0 173 109 and more particularly the terpolymer described in Example 3, namely a methacrylic aci d/methyl acrylate/behenyl alcohol dimethyl-meta-isopropenylbenzylisocyanate ethoxylated (40 EO) terpolymer, as an aqueous 25% dispersion. - (e) copolymers including among their monomers an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and an ester of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and of an oxyalkylenated fatty alcohol.
Preferentially, these compounds also comprise as monomer an ester of an a,b- monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and of a C1-C4 alcohol.
An example of a compound of this type that may be mentioned is Aculyn 22® sold by the company Rohm & Haas, which is a methacrylic acid/ethyl acrylate/oxyalkylenated stearyl methacrylate terpolymer; and also Aculyn 88, also sold by the company Rohm & Haas.
Advantageously, the associative polymer(s) different from the non-carboxylic anionic thickeners are chosen from acrylic associative polymers, more preferentially carboxylic acrylic associative polymers.
Particularly preferably, the associative polymer(s) different from the non- carboxylic anionic thickeners are chosen from copolymers including among their monomers an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and an ester of an a,b-monoethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acid and of an oxyalkylenated fatty alcohol.
Advantageously, the total amount of the associative polymer(s) ranges from 0.05% to 15% by weight, preferably from 0.05% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 5% by weight and even more preferentially from 0.1% to 1% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
Compound containing at least one carboxylic acid group
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one compound, different from the associative polymer(s) as described previously, containing at least one carboxylic acid group.
Preferably, the compound, different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group is chosen from silicone compounds comprising at least one carboxylic group, polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
Polyurethanes and acrylic polymers
According to a preferred embodiment, the hair colouring composition comprises one or more compounds, different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the compound(s), different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group are in the form of aqueous dispersions of particles of polymer(s) chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises one or more compounds, different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group in the form of aqueous dispersions of particles of polymer(s) chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers and mixtures thereof.
Thus, in this embodiment, the polymer(s) used in the aqueous dispersions of polymer particles are different from the associative polymers.
The dispersion(s) may be simple dispersions in the aqueous medium of the cosmetic composition. As a particular case of dispersions, mention may be made of latexes.
The aqueous dispersion(s) of polymer particles may be chosen from aqueous dispersions of polyurethane particles.
More particularly, the polyurethane(s) present in the aqueous dispersions used in the present invention result from the reaction of:
- a prepolymer of formula (A) below:
Figure imgf000061_0001
(A), in which:
- Ri represents a divalent radical of a dihydroxylated compound; - R2 represents a radical of an aliphatic or cycloaliphatic polyisocyanate;
- R3 represents a radical of a low molecular weight diol, optionally substituted with one or more ionic groups;
- n represents an integer ranging from 1 to 5, and
- m is greater than 1; - at least one chain extender according to formula (B) below:
H2N-R4-NH2 (B), in which R4 represents an alkylene or alkylene oxide radical which is not substituted with one or more ionic or potentially ionic groups; and - at least one chain extender according to formula (C) below:
H2N-R5-NH2 (C), in which R5 represents an alkylene radical substituted with one or more ionic or potentially ionic groups.
Among the dihydroxylated compounds that may be used according to the present invention, mention may notably be made of the compounds containing two hydroxyl groups and having a number-average molecular weight from about 700 to about 16 000, and preferably from about 750 to about 5000. As examples of dihydroxylated compounds of high molecular weight, mention may be made of polyol polyesters, polyol polyethers, polyhydroxylated polycarbonates, polyhydroxylated polyacetates, polyhydroxylated polyacrylates, polyhydroxylated amide polyesters, polyhydroxylated polyalkadienes, polyhydroxylated polythioethers, and mixtures thereof. Preferably, the hydroxylated compounds are chosen from polyol polyesters, polyol polyethers, polyhydroxylated polycarbonates, and mixtures thereof.
The polyisocyanates that may be used according to the present invention are notably chosen from organic diisocyanates with a molecular weight of about 112 to 1000, and preferably about 140 to 400.
Preferably, the polyisocyanates are chosen from diisocyanates and more particularly from those represented by the general formula R2(NCO)2, in which R2 represents a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 4 to 18 carbon atoms, a divalent cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 5 to 15 carbon atoms, a divalent araliphatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 7 to 15 carbon atoms or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon-based group containing from 6 to 15 carbon atoms.
Preferably, R2 represents an organic diisocyanate. As examples of organic diisocyanates, the following may notably be chosen: tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,6- hexamethylene diisocyanate, dodecamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3- diisocyanatocyclohexane, 1,4-diisocyanatocyclohexane, 3-isocyanatomethyl-3,5,5- trimethylcyclohexane isocyanate (isophorone diisocyanate or IPDI), bis(4- isocyanatocyclohexyl)methane, l,3-bis(isocyanatomethyl)cyclohexane, 1,4- bis(isocyanatomethyl)cyclohexane, bis(4-isocyanato-3-methyl-cyclohexyl)methane, isomers of toluene diisocyanate (TDI) such as toluene 2,4-diisocyanate, toluene 2,6- diisocyanate and mixtures thereof, hydrogenated toluene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane 4,4’-diisocyanate and mixtures with its diphenylmethane 2,4- diisocyanate isomers and optionally diphenylmethane 2,2’ -diisocyanate isomers, naphthalene 1,5 -diisocyanate, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the diisocyanates are aliphatic and cycloaliphatic diisocyanates, and are more preferentially chosen from 1,6-hexam ethylene diisocyanate, 3- isocyanatomethyl-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexane isocyanate, and mixtures thereof.
According to the present invention, the term “ low molecular weight diol ” refers to a diol with a molecular weight from about 62 to 700, and preferably from 62 to 200. These diols may comprise aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic groups. Preferably, they comprise only aliphatic groups.
Preferably, R.3 represents a low molecular weight diol containing more than 20 carbon atoms, more preferentially chosen from ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,3-butylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, butylethylpropanediol, cyclohexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, 1,6- hexanediol, bisphenol A (2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane), hydrogenated bisphenol A (2,2-bis(4-hydroxycyclohexyl)propane), and mixtures thereof.
The low molecular weight diols may optionally comprise ionic or potentially ionic groups. Examples of low molecular weight diols containing ionic or potentially ionic groups are notably described in patent US 3 412 054. Such compounds are preferably chosen from dimethylolbutanoic acid, dimethylolpropionic acid, polycaprolactone diols containing a carboxyl group, and mixtures thereof.
If low molecular weight diols containing ionic or potentially ionic groups are used, they are preferably used in an amount such that less than 0.30 meq of COOH per gram of polyurethane is present in the polyurethane dispersion.
The prepolymer is extended by means of two families of chain extenders. The first family of chain extenders corresponds to the compounds of general formula (B).
The chain extenders of formula (B) are preferably chosen from alkylenediamines, such as hydrazine, ethylenediamine, propylenediamine, 1,4- butylenediamine, piperazine; alkylene oxide diamines, such as 3-{2-[2-(3- aminopropoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy}propylamine (also known as dipropylamine diethylene glycol or DPA-DEG available from Tomah Products, Milton, Wis.), 2-methyl-l,5- pentanediamine (Dytec A from DuPont), hexanediamine, isophorone diamine, 4,4- methylenedi(cyclohexylamine), ether-amines of the DPA series, available from Tomah Products, Milton, Wis., such as dipropylamine propylene glycol, dipropylamine dipropylene glycol, dipropylamine tripropylene glycol, dipropylamine polypropylene glycol), dipropylamine ethylene glycol, dipropylamine poly(ethylene glycol), dipropylamine 1,3 -propanediol, dipropylamine 2-methyl- 1,3 -propanediol, dipropylamine 1,4-butanediol, dipropylamine 1,3-butanediol, dipropylamine 1,6- hexanediol and dipropylamine cyclohexane- 1,4-dimethanol; and mixtures thereof.
The second family of chain extenders corresponds to the compounds of general formula (C). Such compounds preferably have an ionic or potentially ionic group and two groups that can react with isocyanate groups. Such compounds may optionally comprise two groups that react with isocyanate groups and one group which is ionic or capable of forming an ionic group.
The ionic or potentially ionic group may preferably be chosen from ternary or quaternary ammonium groups or groups that can be converted into such groups, a carboxyl group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonic acid group and a sulfonate group. The at least partial conversion of groups that can be converted into a ternary or quaternary ammonium group salt may be performed before or during the mixing with water.
The chain extenders of formula (C) are preferably chosen from diaminosulfonates, for instance the sodium salt of N-(2-aminoethyl)-2- aminoethanesulfonic acid (ASA), the sodium salt of N-(2-aminoethyl)-2- aminopropionic acid, and mixtures thereof.
The polyurethane that may be used according to the present invention may optionally also comprise compounds which are located, respectively, at the chain ends and terminate said chains (chain terminators). Such compounds are notably described in patents US 7 445 770 and/or US 7452 770.
Preferably, the aqueous dispersion of polyurethane particles has a viscosity of less than 2000 mPa.s at 23°C, more preferentially less than 1500, and even better still less than 1000. Even more preferably, the aqueous polyurethane dispersion has a glass transition temperature of less than 0°C.
Preferably also, the aqueous polyurethane dispersion has a polyurethane (or active material, or solids) content, on the basis of the weight of the dispersion, of from 20% to 60% by weight, more preferentially from 25% to 55% by weight and even better still from 30% to 50% by weight. This means that the polyurethane content (solids) of the aqueous dispersion is preferably from 20% to 60% by weight, more preferentially from 25% to 55% by weight and better still from 30% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the dispersion.
Preferably also, the aqueous dispersion of polyurethane particles has a glass transition temperature (Tg) of less than or equal to -25°C, preferably less than -35°C and more preferentially less than -40°C. The polyurethane particles may have a mean diameter ranging up to about 1000 nm, for example from about 50 nm to about 800 nm, better still from about 100 nm to about 500 nm. These particle sizes may be measured with a laser particle size analyzer (for example Brookhaven BI90).
As non-limiting examples of aqueous polyurethane dispersions, mention may be made of those sold under the name Baycusan® by Bayer, for instance Baycusan® C1000 (INCI name: polyurethane-34), Baycusan® ClOOl (INCI name: polyurethane- 34), Baycusan® Cl 003 (INCI name: polyurethane-32), Baycusan® Cl 004 (INCI name: polyurethane-35) and Baycusan® Cl 008 (INCI name: polyurethane-48).
Mention may also be made of the aqueous polyurethane dispersions of isophthalic acid/adipic acid copolymer/hexylene glycol/neopentyl glycol/dimethylol acid/isophorone diisocyanate (INCI name: Polyurethane- 1, such as Luviset® PUR, BASF), the polyurethane of polycarbonate, polyurethane and aliphatic polyurethane of aliphatic polyester (such as the Neorez® series, DSM, such as Neorez® R989, Neorez® and R-2202).
According to a preferred embodiment, the aqueous dispersion of polyurethane particles may be chosen from aqueous dispersions of particles of compounds having the INCI name polyurethane-35 or compounds having the INCI name polyurethane- 34.
Preferably, the compound(s), different from the associative polymers, containing at least one carboxylic acid group are in the form of aqueous dispersions of particles of acrylic polymers, more preferentially in the form of aqueous dispersions of film-forming acrylic polymer particles.
For the purposes of the invention, the term “ polymer ” means a compound corresponding to the repetition of one or more units (these units being derived from compounds known as monomers). This or these unit(s) are repeated at least twice and preferably at least three times.
The term “film- forming polymer ” refers to a polymer that is capable of forming, by itself or in the presence of an auxiliary film-forming agent, a macroscopically continuous film on a support, notably on keratinous materials, and preferably a cohesive film.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “ acrylic polymer ” means a polymer synthesized from at least one monomer chosen from (meth)acrylic acid and/or (meth)acrylic acid ester and/or (meth)acrylic acid amide. The unit(s) derived from the (meth)acrylic acid monomers of the polymer may optionally be in the form of salt(s), notably of alkali metal, alkaline-earth metal or ammonium salt(s), or organic base salt(s).
The (meth)acrylic acid esters (also known as (meth)acrylates) are advantageously chosen from alkyl (meth)acrylates, in particular Ci to C30, preferably Ci to C20 and better still Ci to C10 alkyl (meth)acrylates, aryl (meth)acrylates, in particular G to C10 aryl (meth)acrylates, and hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates, in particular C2 to G, hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates.
Among the alkyl (meth)acrylates that may be mentioned are methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, 2- ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, lauryl (meth)acrylate and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
Among the hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates that may be mentioned are hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl acrylate, hydroxyethyl methacrylate and 2- hydroxypropyl methacrylate.
Among the aryl (meth)acrylates that may be mentioned are benzyl acrylate and phenyl acrylate.
The (meth)acrylic acid esters that are particularly preferred are alkyl (meth)acrylates, preferably Ci to C30, more preferentially Ci to C20, better still Ci to C10, and even more particularly Ci to C4 alkyl (meth)acrylates.
According to the present invention, the alkyl group of the esters may be fluorinated, or even perfluorinated, i.e. some or all of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group are substituted with fluorine atoms.
As (meth)acrylic acid amides, examples that may be mentioned include (meth)acrylamides and also N-alkyl(meth)acrylamides, in particular N-(C2 to C12 alkyl)(meth)acrylamides. Among the N-alkyl(meth)acrylamides that may be mentioned are N-ethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, N-t-octyl acrylamide and N- undecyl aery 1 ami de .
The acrylic polymer according to the invention may be a homopolymer or a copolymer, advantageously a copolymer, better still a copolymer of (meth)acrylic acid and of (meth)acrylic acid esters.
Preferably, the acrylic polymer(s) according to the invention comprise one or more units derived from the following monomers: a) (meth)acrylic acid; and b) Ci to C30, more preferentially Ci to C20, better still Ci to C10, and even more particularly Ci to C4, alkyl (meth)acrylate. Preferably, the aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles does not comprise any surfactant.
The term “ surfactant ” refers to any agent that is capable of modifying the surface tension between two surfaces.
Among the acrylic polymers according to the invention, mention may be made of copolymers of (meth)acrylic acid and of methyl or ethyl (meth)acrylate, in particular copolymers of methacrylic acid and of ethyl acrylate such as the compound sold under the trade name Luvimer MAE by the company BASF, or the compound Polyacrylate- 2 Crosspolymer sold under the trade name Fixate Superhold Polymer by the company Lubrizol, or the compound Acrylate Copolymer sold under the trade name Daitosol 3000VP3 by the company Daito Kasei Kogyo, or the compound Acrylate Polymer sold under the trade name Daitosol 3000 SLPN-PE1 by the company Daito Kasei Kogyo.
The acrylic polymer may optionally comprise one or more additional monomers, other than the (meth)acrylic acid and/or (meth)acrylic acid ester and/or (meth)acrylic acid amide monomers.
By way of additional monomer, mention will be made, for example, of styrene monomers, in particular styrene and a-methyl styrene, and preferably styrene.
In particular, the acrylic polymer may be a styrene/(meth)acrylate copolymer and notably a polymer chosen from copolymers resulting from the polymerization of at least one styrene monomer and at least one Ci to C20, preferably Ci to C10, alkyl (meth)acrylate monomer.
The Ci to C10 alkyl (meth)acrylate monomer may be chosen from methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, butyl acrylate, hexyl acrylate, octyl acrylate and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate.
As acrylic polymer, mention may be made of the styrene/(meth)acrylate copolymers sold under the name Joncryl 77 by the company BASF, under the name Yodosol GH41F by the company Akzo Nobel and under the name Syntran 5760 CG by the company Interpolymer.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises at least one aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles.
More preferentially, the hair colouring composition comprises at least one aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles comprising one or more units derived from the following monomers: a) (meth)acrylic acid; and b) Ci to C30, more preferentially Ci to C20, better still Ci to C10, and even more particularly Ci to C4, alkyl (meth)acrylate.
Preferably, the aqueous dispersion of acrylic polymer particles has an acrylic polymer (or active material, or solids) content, on the basis of the weight of the dispersion, of from 20% to 60% by weight, more preferentially from 22% to 55% by weight and better still from 25% to 50% by weight.
The total amount of the compound(s), different from the associative polymer(s), containing at least one carboxylic acid group preferably ranges from 0.1% to 35% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 30% by weight, better still from 1% to 25% by weight, and even more preferentially from 3% to 25% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
The total amount of the aqueous dispersion(s) of polymer particles, different from the associative polymer(s) as described previously, chosen from polyurethanes, acrylic polymers, and mixtures thereof, preferably ranges from 0.1% to 35% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 30% by weight, better still from 1% to 25% by weight, and even more preferentially from 3% to 25% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
According to a particular embodiment, the total amount of the aqueous dispersion(s) of acrylic polymer particles, different from the associative polymer(s) as described previously, preferably ranges from 0.1% to 35% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 30% by weight, better still from 1% to 25% by weight, and even more preferentially from 3% to 25% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
Organic solvents
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may comprise one or more organic solvents.
Examples of organic solvents that may be mentioned include lower C1-C4 alkanols, such as ethanol and isopropanol; polyols and polyol ethers, for instance 2- butoxyethanol, propylene glycol, propylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether and monomethyl ether, and also aromatic alcohols, for instance benzyl alcohol or phenoxyethanol, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition comprises one or more organic solvents chosen from C1-C4 lower alkanols, more preferentially ethanol. The organic solvents may be present in a total amount inclusively between 0.01% and 60% by weight approximately relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition, preferably between 0.05% and 50% by weight and more preferentially inclusively between 0.1% and 45% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention is preferably aqueous. The water content may range from 20% to 99% by weight, preferably from 50% to 98% by weight and more preferentially from 60% to 95% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition. Additives
The hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may contain any adjuvant or additive usually used.
Among the additives that may be contained in the hair colouring composition, mention may be made of reducing agents, softeners, antifoams, moisturizers, UV- screening agents, peptizers, solubilizers, fragrances, anionic, cationic, nonionic or amphoteric surfactants, proteins, vitamins, preserving agents, oils, waxes and mixtures thereof.
The hair colouring composition may notably be in the form of a suspension, a dispersion, a gel, an emulsion, notably an oil-in-water (O/W) or water-in-oil (W/O) emulsion, or a multiple emulsion (W/O/W or polyol/O/W or O/W/O), in the form of a cream, a mousse, a stick, a dispersion of vesicles, notably of ionic or nonionic lipids, or a two-phase or multi-phase lotion.
A person skilled in the art may select the appropriate presentation form, and also the method for preparing it, on the basis of his general knowledge, taking into account firstly the nature of the constituents used, notably their solubility in the support, and secondly the intended application of the composition.
Optional application of a composition D The process according to the invention may also comprise a step of applying to the hair keratin fibers a composition D comprising at least one silicone compound comprising at least one carboxylic group, the application of said composition D taking place before the application of the colour-removing composition. The term “carboxylic group” means a COOH or COO functional group, the counterion of the COO group possibly being chosen from alkali metals, alkaline-earth metals and quaternary ammoniums.
The silicones that may be used may be soluble or insoluble in composition D; they may be in the form of oil, wax, resin or gum; silicone oils and gums are preferred.
Silicones are notably described in detail in Walter Noll’s Chemistry and Technology of Silicones (1968), Academic Press.
Preferably, the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group are chosen from the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVII) below:
Figure imgf000070_0001
(XXVII) in which:
- R1 independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; a hydroxyl group; an alkoxy group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms;
- R2 independently represents a group R4-COOM with R4 representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof, and M representing a hydrogen atom; an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; a pyrrolidine radical comprising a carboxylic group COOH or a group Ra-(ORb)x-COOM with Ra representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Rb representing an alkyl group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200; and M representing a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
- R3 independently represent an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; a hydroxyl group; a group R4-COOM with R4 representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof, and M representing a hydrogen atom; an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; an alkoxy group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; an aryl group containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms or a group Ra-(ORb)x-COOM with Ra representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Rb representing an alkyl group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200; and M representing a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- p denotes an integer ranging from 0 to 1000; it being understood that at least one of the radicals R2 and/or R3 comprises a carboxylic group COOH or COOM with M representing an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
Notably, the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group may be chosen from the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVIII) below:
Figure imgf000071_0001
(XXVIII), in which:
- R1 independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and better still from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferentially methyl;
- R4 independently represents a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof; or a divalent group Ra-(ORb)x- with Ra representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, ¾, representing an alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200;
- M independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- the organosiloxanes of formula (XXIX) below:
Figure imgf000072_0001
in which:
- R1 independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferentially a methyl;
- R4 represents a linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof; or a divalent group Ra-(ORb)x- with Ra representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Rb representing an alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200;
- M represents a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
- p denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- the organosiloxanes of formula (XXX) below:
Figure imgf000073_0001
in which:
- R1 independently represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and better still from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferentially methyl;
- R4 represents a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof; or a divalent group Ra-(ORb)x- with Ra representing a linear or branched alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Rb representing an alkylene group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x being an integer ranging from 1 to 200;
- R3 represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group containing from 6 to 12 carbon atoms;
- M independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkali metal or alkaline-earth metal or a quaternary ammonium NR’ 3, with R’, which may be identical or different, representing H or an alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- the organosiloxanes of formula (XXXI) below:
Figure imgf000074_0001
in which:
- R8 represents an alkyl group containing from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, preferably a methyl;
- m denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- and mixtures thereof.
Among the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVIII), mention may be made of polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS) bearing a carboxyl end function, such as the compounds sold by the company Momentive under the trade name Silform INX (INCI name: Bis-Carboxydecyl Dimethicone).
Among the organosiloxanes of formula (XXIX), mention may be made of polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS) bearing a carboxyl side function, such as the compounds sold by the company Shin-Etsu under the trade name X-22-3701E.
Among the organosiloxanes of formula (XXX), mention may be made of polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS) bearing a carboxyl end function, such as the compounds sold by the company Shin-Etsu under the trade name X-22-3710.
Among the organosiloxanes of formula (XXXI), mention may be made of the compounds sold by the company Grant Industries under the trade name Grandsil SiW- PCA-10 (INCI name: Dimethicone (and) PCA Dimethicone (and) Butylene Glycol (and) Decyl Glucoside). The silicone compounds comprising a carboxylic group may correspond, for example, to the compounds described in the patent application EP 186 507 in the name of Chisso Corporation, introduced herein by reference.
Preferably, the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group are chosen from the organosiloxanes of formula (XXVIII), the organopolysiloxanes of formula (XXIX) and mixtures thereof.
More preferentially, the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group are chosen from the organopolysiloxanes of formula (XXIXa) below:
Figure imgf000075_0001
(XXIXa) in which:
- R4 represents a linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkylene group containing from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably from 4 to 16 carbon atoms, optionally interrupted with at least one heteroatom chosen from a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and mixtures thereof, or even from 8 to 12 carbon atoms;
- p denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000.
The total amount of the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group, present in composition D, preferably ranges from 0.01% to 20% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 15% by weight and better still from 0.5% to 10% by weight relative to the total weight of composition D.
Oils
Composition D may comprise one or more oils.
Preferably, composition D comprises one or more oils. More preferentially, composition D comprises one or more oils chosen from alkanes.
The term “oz means a fatty substance that is liquid at room temperature (25°C) and at atmospheric pressure (760 mmHg or 1.013 x 105 Pa). The oil may be volatile or non-volatile.
The term “ volatile oil” refers to an oil that can evaporate on contact with the skin in less than one hour, at room temperature and atmospheric pressure. The volatile oil is a cosmetic volatile oil, which is liquid at room temperature. More specifically, a volatile oil has an evaporation rate of between 0.01 and 200 mg/cm2/min, limits included (see protocol for measuring the evaporation rate indicated in the text below).
The term “ non-volatile oil ” refers to an oil that remains on the skin or the hair keratin fiber at room temperature and atmospheric pressure. More specifically, a non volatile oil has an evaporation rate of strictly less than 0.01 mg/cm2/min (see protocol for measuring the evaporation rate indicated in the text below).
Preferably, the composition comprises one or more oils chosen from C6-Ci6 alkanes and/or mixtures thereof.
As regards the C6-C16 alkanes, they may be linear or branched, and possibly cyclic.
Mention may notably be made of branched Cs-Ci6 alkanes, such as Cs-Ci6 isoalkanes (also known as isoparaffins), isododecane, isodecane or isohexadecane, and for example the oils sold under the Isopar or Permethyl trade names, and mixtures thereof.
Mention may also be made of linear alkanes, preferably of plant origin, comprising from 7 to 15 carbon atoms, in particular from 9 to 14 carbon atoms and more particularly from 11 to 13 carbon atoms.
As examples of linear alkanes that are suitable for use in the invention, mention may be made of n-heptane (C7), n-octane (C8), n-nonane (C9), n-decane (CIO), n-undecane (Cl l), n-dodecane (C12), n-tridecane (C13), n-tetradecane (C14) and n-pentadecane (Cl 5), and mixtures thereof, and in particular the mixture of n- undecane (Cl l) and n-tridecane (C13) described in Example 1 of patent application WO 2008/155 059 by the company Cognis.
Mention may also be made of n-dodecane (C12) and n-tetradecane (C14) sold by Sasol under the references, respectively, Parafol 12-97 and Parafol 14-97, and also mixtures thereof.
As examples of alkanes that are suitable for use in the invention, mention may be made of the alkanes described in patent applications WO 2007/068 371 and WO 2008/155 059. These alkanes are obtained from fatty alcohols, which are themselves obtained from coconut kernel oil or palm oil. According to a particular embodiment, the composition comprises isododecane. Such a compound is, for example, the isododecane sold under the reference Isododecane by Ineos.
Preferably, composition D comprises one or more oils chosen from Cs-Ci6 alkanes, more preferentially from isododecane, isohexadecane, tetradecane and/or mixtures thereof.
More preferentially, composition D comprises isododecane.
Composition D may comprise one or more oils present in a total amount of between 30% and 99% by weight, preferably between 50% and 99% by weight and better still between 70% and 99% by weight, relative to the total weight of composition D.
Composition D may comprise at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof as described previously.
Colour-removing composition
As indicated previously, the process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, in particular the hair, comprises the application of at least one colour- removing composition to said hair keratin fibers, which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition as defined above, said colour-removing composition comprising at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant, and at least one polyol.
Surfactant
As indicated above, the hair colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one surfactant.
Preferably, the surfactant is a cationic surfactant.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “cationic surfactant” means a surfactant that is positively charged when it is contained in the colour-removing composition. This surfactant may bear one or more positive permanent charges or may contain one or more cationizable functions in the composition according to the invention.
The cationic surfactant(s) may be chosen from primary, secondary or tertiary fatty amines, which are optionally polyoxyalkylenated, or salts thereof, quaternary ammonium salts, and mixtures thereof. The cationic surfactant(s) are preferably chosen from quaternary ammonium salts. The faty amines generally comprise at least one C8-C30 hydrocarbon-based chain.
Advantageously, the cationic surfactant(s) are chosen from: - those corresponding to formula (XXXII) below:
X
Figure imgf000078_0001
(XXXII), in which:
- the groups Ri to R4, which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched aliphatic group including from 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aromatic group such as aryl or alkylaryl, at least one of the groups Ri to R4 denoting a linear or branched aliphatic radical including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, preferably from 12 to 24 carbon atoms,
- X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, phosphates, acetates, lactates, (Ci- C4)alkyl sulfates, (Ci-C4)alkylsulfonates or (Ci-C4)alkylarylsulfonates,
Among the quaternary ammonium salts of formula (XXXII), the ones that are preferred are, on the one hand, tetraalkylammonium salts, for instance dialkyldimethylammonium or alkyltrimethylammonium salts in which the alkyl group comprises from about 12 to 22 carbon atoms, in particular behenyltrimethylammonium, distearyldimethylammonium, cetyltrimethylammonium or benzyldimethylstearylammonium salts, or, on the other hand, the palmitylamidopropyltrimethylammonium salts, the stearamidopropyltrimethylammonium salts, the stearamidopropyldimethylcetearylammonium salts, or the stearamidopropyldimethyl(myristyl acetate)ammonium salts sold under the name Ceraphyl® 70 by the company Van Dyk. It is preferred in particular to use the chloride salts of these compounds.
- quaternary ammonium salts of imidazoline, for instance those of formula (XXXIII) below:
Figure imgf000078_0002
(XXXIII), in which:
- R5 represents an alkenyl or alkyl group including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, for example derived from tallow fatty acids,
- R6 represents a hydrogen atom, a C1-C4 alkyl group or an alkenyl or alkyl group including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms,
- R7 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group,
- R8 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group,
- X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, phosphates, acetates, lactates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfonates or alkylarylsulfonates in which the alkyl and aryl groups preferably comprise, respectively, from 1 to 20 carbon atoms and from 6 to 30 carbon atoms,
Preferably, Rs and R.6 denote a mixture of alkenyl or alkyl groups including from 12 to 21 carbon atoms, for example derived from tallow fatty acids, R denotes a methyl group and Rx denotes a hydrogen atom. Such a product is sold, for example, under the name Rewoquat® W 75 by the company Rewo;
- quaternary diammonium or triammonium salts, in particular of formula (XXXIV):
Figure imgf000079_0001
in which:
- R9 denotes an alkyl radical including from about 16 to 30 carbon atoms, which is optionally hydroxylated and/or optionally interrupted with one or more oxygen atoms,
- Rio is chosen from hydrogen or an alkyl radical including from 1 to 4 carbon atoms Or a group (R9a)(Rl0a)(Rlla)N-(CH2)3,
- R9a, Rioa, Riia, Rii, Ri2, Ri3 and Ri4, which may be identical or different, are chosen from hydrogen or an alkyl radical including from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
- X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, acetates, phosphates, nitrates, (Ci- C4)alkyl sulfates, (Ci-C4)alkylsulfonates and (Ci-C4)alkylarylsulfonates, in particular methyl sulfate and ethyl sulfate,
Such compounds are, for example, Finquat CT-P, sold by the company Finetex (Quaternium 89), and Finquat CT, sold by the company Finetex (Quaternium 75); - quaternary ammonium salts containing at least one ester function, such as those of formula (XXXV) below:
Figure imgf000080_0001
in which:
- Ri5 is chosen from C1-C6 alkyl groups and C1-C6 hydroxyalkyl or dihydroxyalkyl groups,
- Ri6 is chosen from: the group
Figure imgf000080_0002
the groups R20, which are linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-C22 hydrocarbon-based groups, a hydrogen atom,
- R18 is chosen from: the group
Figure imgf000080_0003
the groups R22, which are linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-C6 hydrocarbon-based groups, a hydrogen atom,
- Ri7, Ri9 and R21, which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C7-C21 hydrocarbon-based groups;
- r, s and t, which may be identical or different, are integers ranging from 2 to 6;
- y is an integer ranging from 1 to 10;
- x and z, which may be identical or different, are integers ranging from 0 to 10;
- X is a simple or complex, organic or mineral anion; with the proviso that the sum x + y + z is from 1 to 15, that when x is 0 then Ri6 denotes R20, and that when z is 0 then Ris denotes R22.
The alkyl groups R15 may be linear or branched, and more particularly linear. Preferably, R15 denotes a methyl, ethyl, hydroxyethyl or dihydroxypropyl group, and more particularly a methyl or ethyl group.
Advantageously, the sum x + y + z is from 1 to 10. When Ri6 is a hydrocarbon-based group R20, it may be long and contain from 12 to 22 carbon atoms, or short and contain from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
When R18 is a hydrocarbon-based group R22, it preferably contains 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
Advantageously, Rn, R19 and R21, which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C11-C21 hydrocarbon-based groups, and more particularly from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C11- C21 alkyl and alkenyl groups.
Preferably, x and z, which may be identical or different, are equal to 0 or 1.
Advantageously, y is equal to 1.
Preferably, r, s and t, which may be identical or different, are equal to 2 or 3, and even more particularly are equal to 2.
The anion X is preferably a halide (chloride, bromide or iodide) or an alkyl sulfate, more particularly methyl sulfate. However, use may be made of methanesulfonate, phosphate, nitrate, tosylate, an anion derived from an organic acid, such as acetate or lactate, or any other anion that is compatible with the ammonium bearing an ester function.
The anion X is even more particularly chloride or methyl sulfate.
Use is made more particularly, in the composition according to the invention, of the ammonium salts of formula (XXXV) in which:
Ri5 denotes a methyl or ethyl group, x and y are equal to 1 ; z is equal to 0 or 1; r, s and t are equal to 2;
R16 is chosen from:
- the group
Figure imgf000081_0001
- methyl, ethyl or C14-C22 hydrocarbon-based groups,
- a hydrogen atom;
R18 is chosen from:
- the group
Figure imgf000081_0002
- a hydrogen atom; Ri7, Ri9 and R21, which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C13-C17 hydrocarbon-based groups, and preferably from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C13-C17 alkyl and alkenyl groups.
Advantageously, the hydrocarbon-based groups are linear.
Mention may be made, for example, of the compounds of formula (XXXV) such as the diacyloxyethyldimethylammonium, diacyloxyethylhydroxyethyl- methylammonium, monoacyloxyethyldihydroxyethylmethylammonium, triacyloxy- ethylmethylammonium and monoacyloxyethylhydroxyethyldimethylammonium salts (notably chloride or methyl sulfate), and mixtures thereof. The acyl groups preferably contain 14 to 18 carbon atoms and are more particularly derived from a plant oil such as palm oil or sunflower oil. When the compound contains several acyl groups, these groups may be identical or different.
These products are obtained, for example, by direct esterification of triethanolamine, triisopropanolamine, an alkyldiethanolamine or an alkyldiisopropanolamine, which are optionally oxyalkylenated, with C10-C30 fatty acids or with mixtures of C10-C30 fatty acids of plant or animal origin, or by transesterification of the methyl esters thereof. This esterification is followed by a quaternization using an alkylating agent such as an alkyl halide (preferably a methyl or ethyl halide), a dialkyl sulfate (preferably a methyl or ethyl sulfate), methyl methanesulfonate, methyl para-toluenesulfonate, glycol chlorohydrin or glycerol chlorohydrin.
Such compounds are sold, for example, under the names Dehyquart® by the company Henkel, Stepanquat® by the company Stepan, Noxamium® by the company CECA or Rewoquat® WE 18 by the company Rewo-Witco.
The composition according to the invention may contain, for example, a mixture of quaternary ammonium monoester, diester and triester salts with a weight majority of diester salts.
Else may also be made of the ammonium salts containing at least one ester function that are described in patents E1S-A-4 874 554 and E1S-A-4 137 180.
Use may be made of behenoylhydroxypropyltrimethylammonium chloride sold by KAO under the name Quatarmin BTC 131.
Preferably, the ammonium salts containing at least one ester function contain two ester functions. Among the quaternary ammonium salts containing at least one ester function which may be used, it is preferred to use dipalmitoylethylhydroxyethylmethyl- ammonium salts.
The cationic surfactant(s) are preferably chosen from those of formula (XXXII) and those of formula (XXXV) and even more preferentially from those of formula (XXXII).
Most particularly preferably, the cationic surfactant(s) are chosen from those of formula (XXXII), more preferentially from behenyltrimethylammonium salts, cetyltrimethylammonium salts, and a mixture thereof, and even more preferentially from behenyltrimethylammonium chloride, cetyltrimethylammonium chloride, and a mixture thereof.
Preferably, the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants, are present in a total content ranging from 0.05% to 15% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight, and better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
In a particularly advantageous embodiment, the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants, are present in a total content of greater than or equal to 0.5% by weight, preferably ranging from 0.5% to 5% by weight, better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
Polyol
As indicated previously, the colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention comprises at least one polyol.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “polyol” means an organic compound constituted of a hydrocarbon-based chain optionally interrupted with one or more oxygen atoms and bearing at least two free hydroxyl groups (-OH) borne by different carbon atoms, this compound possibly being cyclic or acyclic, linear or branched, and saturated or unsaturated.
More particularly, the polyol(s) comprise from 2 to 30 hydroxyl groups, more preferentially from 2 to 10 hydroxyl groups, more preferentially still from 2 to 3 hydroxyl groups.
Preferably, the colour-removing composition comprises one or more polyols chosen from diglycerol, glycerol, propylene glycol, propane-1, 3-diol, 1,3-butylene glycol, pentane- 1,2-diol, octane- 1,2-diol, dipropylene glycol, hexylene glycol, ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, sorbitol, sugars, such as glucose, and mixtures thereof, preferably from propylene glycol.
Advantageously, the polyol(s) are present in a total content of at least 35% by weight, preferably ranging from 35% to 95% by weight, more preferentially from 35% to 85% by weight, and even more preferentially from 35% to 70% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
Alkyl or alkylene carbonate
The colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one alkyl or alkylene carbonate.
The term “alkyl carbonate” means an alkyl or dialkyl carbonate.
Preferably, the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is a C1-C30, preferably C1-C6, alkyl or C1-C30, preferably C1-C6, alkylene carbonate; more preferentially, the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is chosen from alkylene carbonates, better still from propylene carbonate, butylene carbonate, pentylene carbonate and mixtures thereof.
Particularly preferably, the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is chosen from propylene carbonate.
Advantageously, when it is (they are) present, the content of alkyl or alkylene carbonate ranges from 10% to 60% by weight, preferably from 15% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
Glycol ether
The colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one glycol ether different from the polyols described previously.
Preferably, the glycol ether is chosen from those of formula RII(-0-CH(CH3)- CH2)nOH, in which R11 denotes a C1-C30, preferably C1-C6 and more preferentially Ci- C4 alkyl radical, and in which n is from 1 to 50, preferably from 2 to 50, more preferably from 2 to 10, preferentially 2 to 5.
Advantageously, the glycol ether is of formula CH3(-0-CH(CH3)-CH2)n0H, in which n is from 2 to 50, preferably from 2 to 10, more preferentially from 2 to 5.
Particularly preferably, the glycol ether is chosen from tripropylene glycol methyl ether, tripropylene glycol ethyl ether, tripropylene glycol propyl ether, tripropylene glycol butyl ether and mixtures thereof, preferably tripropylene glycol methyl ether. The total content of glycol ether(s), when they are present, preferably ranges from 5% to 30% by weight, preferably from 5% to 15% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
Fatty substance
The colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one fatty substance.
Said fatty substances may be liquid fatty substances (or oils) and/or solid fatty substances. The term “liquid fatty substance” means a fatty substance having a melting point of less than or equal to 25°C at atmospheric pressure (1.013xl05 Pa). The term “solid fatty substance” means a fatty substance having a melting point of greater than 25°C at atmospheric pressure (1.013>< 105 Pa).
For the purposes of the present invention, the melting point corresponds to the temperature of the most endothermic peak observed on thermal analysis (differential scanning calorimetry or DSC) as described in the standard ISO 11357-3; 1999. The melting point may be measured using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), for example the calorimeter sold under the name MDSC 2920 by the company TA Instruments. In the present patent application, all the melting points are determined at atmospheric pressure (1.013xl05 Pa).
The term “fatty substance” means an organic compound that is insoluble in water at 25°C and at atmospheric pressure (1.013xl05 Pa) (solubility of less than 5% by weight, preferably less than 1% by weight and even more preferentially less than 0.1% by weight). They bear in their structure at least one hydrocarbon-based chain including at least 6 carbon atoms and/or a sequence of at least two siloxane groups. In addition, the fatty substances are generally soluble in organic solvents under the same temperature and pressure conditions, for instance chloroform, dichloromethane, carbon tetrachloride, ethanol, benzene, toluene, tetrahydrofuran (THF), liquid petroleum jelly or decamethylcyclopentasiloxane.
Advantageously, the fatty substances that may be used in the present invention are neither (poly)oxyalkylenated nor (poly)glycerolated.
Preferably, useful fatty substances according to the invention are non-silicone.
The term “non-silicone fatty substance” refers to a fatty substance not containing any Si-0 bonds and the term “silicone fatty substance” refers to a fatty substance containing at least one Si-0 bond. More particularly, the liquid fatty substance(s) according to the invention are chosen from G to Ci6 liquid hydrocarbons, liquid hydrocarbons comprising more than 16 carbon atoms, nonsilicone oils of animal origin, oils of triglyceride type of plant or synthetic origin, fluoro oils, liquid fatty alcohols, liquid fatty acid and/or fatty alcohol esters other than triglycerides, and silicone oils, and mixtures thereof.
It is recalled that the fatty alcohols, esters and acids more particularly contain at least one saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched hydrocarbon-based group, comprising 6 to 40 and better still from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted, in particular, with one or more hydroxyl groups (in particular 1 to 4). If they are unsaturated, these compounds may comprise one to three conjugated or unconjugated carbon-carbon double bonds.
As regards the G, to Ci6 liquid hydrocarbons, they may be linear, branched, or optionally cyclic, and are preferably chosen from alkanes. Examples that may be mentioned include hexane, cyclohexane, undecane, dodecane, isododecane, tridecane or isoparaffins, such as isohexadecane or isodecane, and mixtures thereof.
The liquid hydrocarbons comprising more than 16 carbon atoms may be linear or branched, and of mineral or synthetic origin, and are preferably chosen from liquid paraffins or liquid petroleum jelly, polydecenes, hydrogenated polyisobutene such as Parleam®, and mixtures thereof.
A hydrocarbon-based oil of animal origin that may be mentioned is perhydrosqualene.
The triglyceride oils of plant or synthetic origin are preferably chosen from liquid fatty acid triglycerides including from 6 to 30 carbon atoms, for instance heptanoic or octanoic acid triglycerides, or alternatively, for example, sunflower oil, corn oil, soybean oil, marrow oil, grapeseed oil, sesame seed oil, hazelnut oil, apricot oil, macadamia oil, arara oil, castor oil, avocado oil, caprylic/capric acid triglycerides, for instance those sold by the company Stearinerie Dubois or those sold under the names Miglyol® 810, 812 and 818 by the company Dynamit Nobel, jojoba oil and shea butter oil, and mixtures thereof.
As regards the fluoro oils, they may be chosen from perfluoromethylcyclopentane and perfluoro-l,3-dimethylcyclohexane, sold under the names Flutec® PCI and Flutec® PC3 by the company BNFL Fluorochemicals; perfluoro-l,2-dimethylcyclobutane; perfluoroalkanes such as dodecafluoropentane and tetradecafluorohexane, sold under the names PF 5050® and PF 5060® by the company 3M, or bromoperfluorooctyl sold under the name Foralkyl® by the company Atochem; nonafluoromethoxybutane and nonafluoroethoxyisobutane; perfluoromorpholine derivatives such as 4-trifluoromethylperfluoromorpholine sold under the name PF 5052® by the company 3M.
The term “fatty alcohol” means a long-chain aliphatic alcohol comprising from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 40 carbon atoms, and comprising at least one hydroxyl group OH. These fatty alcohols are neither oxyalkylenated nor glycerolated.
The liquid fatty alcohols that are suitable for use in the invention are more particularly chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alcohols, preferably unsaturated or branched alcohols, including from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples that may be mentioned include octyl dodecanol, 2-butyloctanol, 2-hexyldecanol, 2-undecylpentadecanol, isostearyl alcohol, oleyl alcohol, linolenyl alcohol, ricinoleyl alcohol, undecylenyl alcohol and linoleyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof.
As regards the liquid esters of fatty acids and/or of fatty alcohols other than the triglycerides mentioned above, mention may be made notably of esters of saturated or unsaturated, linear Ci to C26 or branched C3 to C26 aliphatic monoacids or polyacids and of saturated or unsaturated, linear Ci to C26 or branched C3 to C26 aliphatic monoalcohols or polyalcohols, the total carbon number of the esters being greater than or equal to 6 and more advantageously greater than or equal to 10.
Preferably, for the esters of monoalcohols, at least one from among the alcohol and the acid from which the esters of the invention are derived is branched.
Among the monoesters, mention may be made of dihydroabietyl behenate; octyldodecyl behenate; isocetyl behenate; isostearyl lactate; lauryl lactate; linoleyl lactate; oleyl lactate; isostearyl octanoate; isocetyl octanoate; octyl octanoate; decyl oleate; isocetyl isostearate; isocetyl laurate; isocetyl stearate; isodecyl octanoate; isodecyl oleate; isononyl isononanoate; isostearyl palmitate; methyl acetyl ricinoleate; octyl isononanoate; 2-ethylhexyl isononanoate; octyldodecyl erucate; oleyl erucate; ethyl palmitate, isopropyl palmitate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate, 2-octyldecyl palmitate, alkyl myristates such as isopropyl myristate, isobutyl stearate; 2-hexyldecyl laurate, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, among the monoesters of monoacids and of monoalcohols, use will be made of ethyl palmitate and isopropyl palmitate, alkyl myristates such as isopropyl myristate or ethyl myristate, isocetyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl isononanoate, isodecyl neopentanoate and isostearyl neopentanoate, and mixtures thereof. Still within the context of this variant, esters of C4 to C22 dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acids and of Ci to C22 alcohols and esters of mono-, di- or tricarboxylic acids and of C2 to C26 di-, tri-, tetra- or pentahydroxy alcohols may also be used.
Mention may notably be made of: diethyl sebacate; diisopropyl sebacate; diisopropyl adipate; di-n-propyl adipate; dioctyl adipate; diisostearyl adipate; dioctyl maleate; glyceryl undecylenate; octyldodecyl stearoyl stearate; pentaerythrityl monoricinoleate; pentaerythrityl tetraisononanoate; pentaerythrityl tetrapelargonate; pentaerythrityl tetraisostearate; pentaerythrityl tetraoctanoate; propylene glycol dicaprylate; propylene glycol dicaprate; tridecyl erucate; triisopropyl citrate; triisostearyl citrate; glyceryl trilactate; glyceryl trioctanoate; tri octyldodecyl citrate; trioleyl citrate; propylene glycol dioctanoate; neopentyl glycol diheptanoate; diethylene glycol diisononanoate; polyethylene glycol distearates, and mixtures thereof.
The composition may also comprise, as fatty ester, sugar esters and diesters of Ce to C30, preferably C12 to C22, fatty acids. It is recalled that the term “sugar” refers to oxygen-bearing hydrocarbon-based compounds bearing several alcohol functions, with or without aldehyde or ketone functions, and which include at least 4 carbon atoms. These sugars may be monosaccharides, oligosaccharides or polysaccharides.
Examples of suitable sugars that may be mentioned include sucrose, glucose, galactose, ribose, fucose, maltose, fructose, mannose, arabinose, xylose and lactose, and derivatives thereof, notably alkyl derivatives, such as methyl derivatives, for instance methylglucose.
The sugar esters of fatty acids may be chosen notably from the group comprising the esters or mixtures of esters of sugars described previously and of linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated G to C30 and preferably C12 to C22 fatty acids. If they are unsaturated, these compounds may comprise one to three conjugated or unconjugated carbon-carbon double bonds.
The esters according to this variant may also be chosen from mono-, di-, tri- and tetraesters, polyesters, and mixtures thereof. These esters may be, for example, oleates, laurates, palmitates, myristates, behenates, cocoates, stearates, linoleates, linolenates, caprates, arachidonates or mixtures thereof, for instance notably the mixed oleopalmitate, oleostearate and palmitostearate esters. More particularly, use is made of monoesters and diesters and notably sucrose, glucose or methylglucose mono- or di-oleates, -stearates, -behenates, - oleopalmitates, -linoleates, -linolenates and -oleostearates, and mixtures thereof.
An example that may be mentioned is the product sold under the name Glucate® DO by the company Amerchol, which is a methylglucose dioleate.
Preferably, use will be made of a liquid ester of a monoacid and of a monoalcohol.
The silicone oils that may be used in the composition according to the present invention may be volatile or non-volatile, cyclic, linear or branched silicone oils, which are unmodified or modified with organic groups, and preferably have a viscosity from 5xl06 to 2.5 m2/s at 25°C, and preferably lxlO 5 to 1 m2/s.
Preferably, the silicone oils are chosen from polydialkylsiloxanes, notably polydimethylsiloxanes (PDMS), and liquid polyorganosiloxanes including at least one aryl group.
These silicone oils may also be organomodified. The organomodified silicone oils that may be used in accordance with the invention are preferably liquid silicones as defined previously and including in their structure one or more organofunctional groups attached via a hydrocarbon-based group, chosen, for example, from amine groups and alkoxy groups.
Organopolysiloxanes are defined in greater detail in Walter Noll’s Chemistry and Technology of Silicones (1968), Academic Press. They may be volatile or non volatile.
When they are volatile, the silicone oils are more particularly chosen from those with a boiling point of between 60°C and 260°C, and even more particularly from:
(i) cyclic polydialkylsiloxanes including from 3 to 7 and preferably from 4 to 5 silicon atoms. These are, for example, octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane sold notably under the name Volatile Silicone® 7207 by Union Carbide or Silbione® 70045 V2 by Rhodia, decamethylcyclopentasiloxane sold under the name Volatile Silicone® 7158 by Union Carbide, and Silbione® 70045 V5 by Rhodia, and mixtures thereof.
Mention may also be made of cyclocopolymers of the dimethylsiloxane/methylalkylsiloxane type, such as Volatile Silicone® FZ 3109 sold by the company Union Carbide.
Mention may also be made of mixtures of cyclic polydialkylsiloxanes with organosilicon compounds, such as the mixture of octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and tetra(trimethylsilyl)pentaerythritol (50/50) and the mixture of octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane and oxy-l,r-bis(2,2,2’,2’,3,3’- hexatrimethylsilyloxy)neopentane;
(ii) linear volatile polydialkylsiloxanes containing 2 to 9 silicon atoms and having a viscosity of less than or equal to 5x 106 m2/s at 25°C. An example is decamethyltetrasiloxane notably sold under the name SH 200 by the company Toray Silicone. Silicones falling within this category are also described in the article published in Cosmetics and Toiletries, Vol. 91, Jan. 76, pp. 27-32, Todd & Byers Volatile Silicone Fluids for Cosmetics.
These silicone oils may be more particularly chosen from polydialkylsiloxanes, among which mention may be made mainly of polydimethylsiloxanes bearing trimethylsilyl end groups. The viscosity of the silicones is measured at 25°C according to the standard ASTM 445, Appendix C.
Among these polydialkylsiloxanes, mention may be made, in a non-limiting manner, of the following commercial products:
- the Silbione® oils of the 47 and 70 047 series or the Mirasil® oils sold by Rhodia, for instance the oil 70 047 V 500 000;
- the oils of the Mirasil® series sold by the company Rhodia;
- the oils of the 200 series from the company Dow Corning, such as DC200 with a viscosity of 60 000 mm2/s;
- the Viscasil® oils from General Electric and certain oils of the SF series (SF 96, SF 18) from General Electric.
Mention may also be made of polydimethylsiloxanes bearing dimethylsilanol end groups, known under the name dimethiconol (CTFA), such as the oils of the 48 series from the company Rhodia.
The organomodified silicones that may be used in accordance with the invention are silicones as defined above and including in their structure one or more organofunctional groups attached via a hydrocarbon-based group.
As regards the liquid polyorganosiloxanes including at least one aryl group, they may notably be polydiphenylsiloxanes, and polyalkylarylsiloxanes functionalized with the organofunctional groups mentioned previously.
The polyalkylarylsiloxanes are particularly chosen from linear and/or branched polydimethyl/methylphenylsiloxanes and polydimethyl/diphenylsiloxanes with a viscosity ranging from 1 x 105 to 5x 102 m2/s at 25°C. Among these polyalkylarylsiloxanes, examples that may be mentioned include the products sold under the following names:
- the Silbione® oils of the 70 641 series from Rhodia;
- the oils of the Rhodorsil® 70 633 and 763 series from Rhodia;
- the oil Dow Corning 556 Cosmetic Grade Fluid from Dow Coming;
- the silicones of the PK series from Bayer, such as the product PK20;
- the silicones of the PN and PH series from Bayer, such as the products PN1000 and PHI 000;
- certain oils of the SF series from General Electric, such as SF 1023, SF 1154, SF 1250 and SF 1265.
Among the organomodified silicones, mention may be made of polyorganosiloxanes including:
- substituted or unsubstituted amine groups, such as the products sold under the names GP 4 Silicone Fluid and GP 7100 by the company Genesee or the products sold under the names Q2 8220 and Dow Corning 929 or 939 by the company Dow Corning. The substituted amine groups are in particular Cl to C4 aminoalkyl groups;
- alkoxy groups,
- hydroxyl groups.
Particularly preferably, the colour-removing composition comprises at least one liquid fatty substance chosen from triglycerides oils of plant or synthetic origin, preferentially chosen from caprylic/capric acid triglycerides.
The solid fatty substances according to the invention preferably have a viscosity of greater than 2 Pa.s, measured at 25°C and at a shear rate of 1 s 1.
The solid fatty substance(s) are preferably chosen from solid fatty acids, solid fatty alcohols, solid esters of fatty acids and/or of fatty alcohols, waxes, ceramides and mixtures thereof.
The term “fatty acid” means a long-chain carboxylic acid comprising from 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 8 to 30 carbon atoms. The solid fatty acids according to the invention preferentially comprise from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and better still from 14 to 22 carbon atoms. They may optionally be hydroxylated. These fatty acids are neither oxyalkylenated nor glycerolated.
The solid fatty acids that may be used in the present invention are notably chosen from myristic acid, cetylic acid, stearylic acid, palmitic acid, arachidic acid, stearic acid, lauric acid, behenic acid, 12-hydroxy stearic acid, and mixtures thereof. Particularly preferably, the solid fatty substance(s) are chosen from lauric acid, myristic acid, cetylic acid, palmitic acid and stearic acid.
The solid fatty alcohols may be saturated or unsaturated, and linear or branched, and include from 8 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms. Preferably, the solid fatty alcohols have the structure R-OH with R denoting a linear alkyl group, optionally substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups, comprising from 8 to 40, preferentially from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, better still from 10 to 30, or even from 12 to 24 atoms and even better still from 14 to 22 carbon atoms.
The solid fatty alcohols that may be used are preferably chosen from saturated or unsaturated, linear or branched, preferably linear and saturated, (mono)alcohols including from 8 to 40 carbon atoms, better still from 10 to 30, or even from 12 to 24 and even better still from 14 to 22 carbon atoms.
The solid fatty alcohols that may be used may be chosen, alone or as a mixture, from: myristyl alcohol (or 1-tetradecanol); cetyl alcohol (or 1-hexadecanol); stearyl alcohol (or 1-octadecanol); arachidyl alcohol (or 1-eicosanol); behenyl alcohol (or 1- docosanol); lignoceryl alcohol (or 1-tetracosanol); ceryl alcohol (or 1-hexacosanol); montanyl alcohol (or 1-octacosanol); myricyl alcohol (or 1-triacontanol).
Preferentially, the solid fatty alcohol is chosen from cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, behenyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, arachidyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof, such as cetylstearyl alcohol or cetearyl alcohol.
Particularly preferably, the solid fatty alcohol is myristyl alcohol.
The solid esters of a fatty acid and/or of a fatty alcohol that may be used are preferably chosen from esters derived from a C9-C26 carboxylic fatty acid and/or from a C9-C26 fatty alcohol.
Preferably, these solid fatty esters are esters of a linear or branched, saturated carboxylic acid including at least 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and more particularly from 12 to 24 carbon atoms, and of a linear or branched, saturated monoalcohol, including at least 10 carbon atoms, preferably from 10 to 30 carbon atoms and more particularly from 12 to 24 carbon atoms. The saturated carboxylic acids may be optionally hydroxylated, and are preferably monocarboxylic acids.
Esters of C4-C22 dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acids and of C1-C22 alcohols and esters of monocarboxylic, dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acids and of C2-C26 dihydroxy, trihydroxy, tetrahydroxy or pentahydroxy alcohols may also be used. Mention may notably be made of octyldodecyl behenate, isocetyl behenate, cetyl lactate, stearyl octanoate, octyl octanoate, cetyl octanoate, decyl oleate, hexyl stearate, octyl stearate, myristyl stearate, cetyl stearate, stearyl stearate, octyl pelargonate, cetyl myristate, myristyl myristate, stearyl myristate, diethyl sebacate, diisopropyl sebacate, diisopropyl adipate, di-n-propyl adipate, dioctyl adipate, dioctyl maleate, octyl palmitate, myristyl palmitate, cetyl palmitate, stearyl palmitate, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the solid esters of a fatty acid and/or of a fatty alcohol are chosen from C9-C26 alkyl palmitates, notably myristyl palmitate, cetyl palmitate or stearyl palmitate; C9-C26 alkyl myri states, such as cetyl myristate, stearyl myristate and myristyl myristate; and C9-C26 alkyl stearates, notably myristyl stearate, cetyl stearate and stearyl stearate; and mixtures thereof.
For the purposes of the present invention, a wax is a lipophilic compound, which is solid at 25°C and atmospheric pressure, with a reversible solid/liquid change of state, having a melting point greater than about 40°C, which may be up to 200°C, and having in the solid state anisotropic crystal organization. In general, the size of the wax crystals is such that the crystals diffract and/or scatter light, giving the composition that comprises them a more or less opaque cloudy appearance. By bringing the wax to its melting point, it is possible to make it miscible with oils and to form a microscopically homogeneous mixture, but on returning the temperature of the mixture to room temperature, recrystallization of the wax, which is microscopically and macroscopically detectable (opalescence), is obtained.
In particular, the waxes that are suitable for use in the invention may be chosen from waxes of animal, plant or mineral origin, non-silicone synthetic waxes, and mixtures thereof.
Mention may be made notably of hydrocarbon-based waxes, for instance beeswax, notably of biological origin, lanolin wax and Chinese insect waxes; rice bran wax, carnauba wax, candelilla wax, ouricury wax, esparto grass wax, berry wax, shellac wax, Japan wax and sumac wax; montan wax, orange wax and lemon wax, microcrystalline waxes, paraffins and ozokerite; polyethylene waxes, the waxes obtained by Fischer-Tropsch synthesis and waxy copolymers, and also esters thereof.
Mention may also be made of C20 to C60 microcrystalline waxes, such as Micro wax HW.
Mention may also be made of the MW 500 polyethylene wax sold under the reference Permalen 50-L polyethylene. Mention may also be made of the waxes obtained by catalytic hydrogenation of animal or plant oils containing linear or branched C8-C32 fatty chains. Among these waxes, mention may notably be made of isomerized jojoba oil such as the trans- isomerized partially hydrogenated jojoba oil, notably the product manufactured or sold by the company Desert Whale under the commercial reference Iso-Jojoba-50®, hydrogenated sunflower oil, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated coconut oil, hydrogenated lanolin oil and bis(l,l,l-trimethylolpropane) tetrastearate, notably the product sold under the name Hest 2T-4S® by the company Heterene.
The waxes obtained by hydrogenation of castor oil esterified with cetyl alcohol, such as those sold under the names Phytowax Castor 16L64® and 22L73® by the company Sophim, may also be used.
A wax that may also be used is a C20-C40 alkyl (hydroxystearyloxy)stearate (the alkyl group containing from 20 to 40 carbon atoms), alone or as a mixture. Such a wax is notably sold under the names Kester Wax K 82 P®, Hydroxypolyester K 82 P® and Kester Wax K 80 P® by the company Koster Keunen.
It is also possible to use microwaxes in the compositions of the invention; mention may be made notably of carnauba microwaxes, such as the product sold under the name MicroCare 350® by the company Micro Powders, synthetic-wax microwaxes, such as the product sold under the name MicroEase 114S® by the company Micro Powders, microwaxes constituted of a mixture of carnauba wax and polyethylene wax, such as the products sold under the names Micro Care 300® and 310® by the company Micro Powders, microwaxes constituted of a mixture of carnauba wax and of synthetic wax, such as the product sold under the name Micro Care 325® by the company Micro Powders, polyethylene microwaxes, such as the products sold under the names Micropoly 200®, 220®, 220L® and 250S® by the company Micro Powders, and polytetrafluoroethylene microwaxes, such as the products sold under the names Microslip 519® and 519 L® by the company Micro Powders.
The waxes are preferably chosen from mineral waxes, for instance paraffin, petroleum jelly, lignite or ozokerite wax; plant waxes, for instance cocoa butter or cork fiber or sugar cane waxes, olive tree wax, rice wax, hydrogenated jojoba wax, ouricury wax, carnauba wax, candelilla wax, alfalfa wax, or absolute waxes of flowers, such as essential wax of blackcurrant flower sold by the company Bertin (France); waxes of animal origin, for instance beeswaxes or modified beeswaxes (cerabellina), spermaceti, lanolin wax and lanolin derivatives; microcrystalline waxes; and mixtures thereof.
The ceramides, or ceramide analogs such as glycoceramides, which may be used in the compositions according to the invention, are known; mention may in particular be made of ceramides of classes I, II, III and V according to the Dawning classification.
The ceramides or analogues thereof that may be used preferably correspond to the following formula: R3CH(0H)CH(CH20R2)(NHC0R1), in which:
R1 denotes a linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkyl group, derived from C14-C30 fatty acids, it being possible for this group to be substituted with a hydroxyl group in the alpha position, or a hydroxyl group in the omega position esterified with a saturated or unsaturated C16-C30 fatty acid;
R2 denotes a hydrogen atom, a (glycosyl)n group, a (galactosyl)m group or a sulfogalactosyl group, in which n is an integer ranging from 1 to 4 and m is an integer ranging from 1 to 8;
R3 denotes a C15-C26 hydrocarbon-based group, saturated or unsaturated in the alpha position, it being possible for this group to be substituted with one or more Cl -Cl 4 alkyl groups; it being understood that in the case of natural ceramides or glycoceramides, R3 may also denote a C15-C26 alpha-hydroxyalkyl group, the hydroxyl group being optionally esterified by a C16-C30 alpha-hydroxy acid.
The ceramides that are more particularly preferred are the compounds for which R1 denotes a saturated or unsaturated alkyl derived from C16-C22 fatty acids; R2 denotes a hydrogen atom and R3 denotes a saturated linear Cl 5 group.
Preferentially, use is made of ceramides for which R1 denotes a saturated or unsaturated alkyl group derived from C14-C30 fatty acids; R2 denotes a galactosyl or sulfogalactosyl group; and R3 denotes a -CH=CH-(CH2)i2-CH3 group.
Use may also be made of the compounds for which R1 denotes a saturated or unsaturated alkyl radical derived from C12-C22 fatty acids; R2 denotes a galactosyl or sulfogalactosyl radical and R3 denotes a saturated or unsaturated C12-C22 hydrocarbon-based radical and preferably a -CH=CH-(CH2)i2-CH3 group.
As compounds that are particularly preferred, mention may also be made of 2-N-linoleoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol; 2-N-oleoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol; 2-N- palmitoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol; 2-N-stearoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol; 2-N- behenoylaminooctadecane-l,3-diol; 2-N-[2-hydroxypalmitoyl]aminooctadecane-l,3- diol; 2-N-stearoylaminooctadecane-l,3,4-triol and in particular N- stearoylphytosphingosine, 2-N-palmitoylaminohexadecane-l,3-diol, N- linoleoyldihydrosphingosine, N-oleoyldihydrosphingosine, N- palmitoyldihydrosphingosine, N-stearoyldihydrosphingosine, and N- behenoyldihydrosphingosine, N-docosanoyl-N-methyl-D-glucamine, cetylic acid N- (2-hydroxyethyl)-N-(3-cetyloxy-2-hydroxypropyl)amide and bis(N-hydroxyethyl-N- cetyl)malonamide; and mixtures thereof. N-Oleoyldihydrosphingosine will preferably be used.
The solid fatty substances are preferably chosen from solid fatty acids, solid fatty alcohols and mixtures thereof.
Particularly preferably, the colour-removing composition comprises at least one solid fatty substance chosen from solid fatty alcohols, preferably myristyl alcohol.
According to another preferred embodiment, the composition according to the invention comprises at least one liquid fatty substance and at least one solid fatty substance, preferentially at least one triglyceride oil of plant or synthetic origin, more preferentially chosen from triglycerides of caprylic/capric acid and at least one solid fatty alcohol, more preferentially at least one triglyceride oil of plant or synthetic origin chosen from triglycerides of caprylic/capric acid and at least one solid fatty alcohol chosen from myristyl alcohol.
When the colour-removing composition comprises one or more fatty substances, the total content of fatty substance(s) preferably ranges from 0.5% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 1% to 10% by weight and better still from 1% to 5% by weight, relative to the total weight of the composition.
Water-soluble organic solvents
The colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may also comprise at least one water-soluble organic solvent chosen from monoalcohols containing from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, such as ethanol, isopropanol and butanol.
The colour-removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention may comprise water.
According to another particular embodiment, the colour-removing composition does not comprise any water.
Moreover, the additives as mentioned above may be included in the colour- removing composition used in the context of the process according to the invention. Protocol
The hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D described above may be used on wet or dry hair keratin fibers, and also on any type of fair or dark, natural or coloured, permanent-waved, bleached or relaxed hair keratin fibers.
According to a preferred embodiment, the hair colouring composition C and composition D are applied simultaneously to the hair keratin fibers.
According to another preferred embodiment, composition D is applied to the hair keratin fibers after applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers.
According to another preferred embodiment, composition D is applied to the hair keratin fibers before applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers.
According to a particular embodiment of the invention, the hair keratin fibers are washed before applying the hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D.
Preferably, a washing, rinsing, draining or drying step is performed after applying the hair colouring composition to the hair keratin fibers and before applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers.
More preferentially, a drying step is performed after applying the hair colouring composition to the hair keratin fibers and before applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers.
The application to the hair keratin fibers may be performed via any standard means, in particular using a comb, a fine brush, a coarse brush, a sponge or with the fingers.
The application of the hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D to the hair keratin fibers is generally performed at room temperature (between 15 and 25°C).
After applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers, it is possible to wait for between 1 minute and 6 hours, in particular between 1 minute and 2 hours, more particularly between 1 minute and 1 hour, more preferentially between 1 minute and 30 minutes, before, for example, applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers or, for example, a washing, rinsing, draining or drying step.
Preferably, there is no leave-on time after applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers and before applying composition D to the hair keratin fibers. After applying the hair colouring composition C and the optional composition D, the hair keratin fibers may be left to dry or may be dried, for example at a temperature of greater than or equal to 30°C.
The process according to the invention may thus comprise a step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers using a heating tool.
The heat application step of the process of the invention may be performed using a hood, a hairdryer, a straightening iron, a curling iron, a Climazon, etc.
Preferably, the heat application step of the process of the invention is performed using a hairdryer.
When the process of the invention involves a step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers, the step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers takes place after applying the hair colouring composition and the optional composition D to the hair keratin fibers.
During the step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers, a mechanical action may be exerted on the locks, such as combing, brushing or running the fingers through.
When the step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers is performed using a hood or a hairdryer, the temperature is preferably between 30°C and 110°C, preferentially between 50°C and 90°C.
When the step of applying heat to the hair keratin fibers is performed using a straightening iron, the temperature is preferably between 110°C and 220°C, preferably between 140°C and 200°C.
In a particular variant, the process of the invention involves a step (bl) of applying heat using a hood, a hairdryer or a Climazon, preferably a hairdryer, and a step (b2) of applying heat using a straightening or curling iron, preferably a straightening iron.
Step (bl) may be performed before step (b2).
During step (bl), also referred to as the drying step, the hair keratin fibers may be dried, for example at a temperature of greater than or equal to 30°C. According to a particular embodiment, this temperature is greater than 40°C. According to a particular embodiment, this temperature is greater than 45°C and less than 110°C.
Preferably, if the hair keratin fibers are dried, they are dried, in addition to a supply of heat, with a flow of air. This flow of air during drying makes it possible to improve the strand separation of the coating.
During drying, a mechanical action may be exerted on the locks, such as combing, brushing or running the fingers through. During step (b2), the passage of the straightening or curling iron, preferably the straightening iron, may be performed at a temperature ranging from 110°C to 220°C, preferably between 140°C and 200°C.
After the drying step, a shaping step may be performed, for example with a straightening iron; the temperature for the shaping step is between 110 and 220°C, preferably between 140 and 200°C.
Preferably, the invention is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, such as the hair, which have been coloured beforehand, notably comprising: i) the application to said hair keratin fibers of the hair colouring composition C as described above, and then ii) optionally a leave-on time of said hair colouring composition C on the fibers of from 1 minute to 30 minutes, preferably from 1 to 20 minutes, and then iii) optionally a step of washing, rinsing, draining or drying said hair keratin fibers, and then iv) the application to said hair keratin fibers of a composition D comprising at least one silicone compound comprising at least one carboxylic group as described previously; and then v) optionally a leave-on time of said composition D on the fibers of from 1 minute to 30 minutes, preferably from 1 to 20 minutes, and then vi) optionally a step of washing, rinsing, draining or drying said fibers.
Preferably, the step of applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers is repeated several times.
According to a preferred embodiment, the colour-removing process is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, such as the hair, which have been coloured beforehand, notably comprising a step of extemporaneous mixing at the time of use of at least two compositions A and B to obtain the hair colouring composition C as defined above and of applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers, with:
- composition A comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound as described previously;
- composition B comprising at least one compound, different from the associative polymers as described previously, containing at least one carboxylic acid group as described previously; composition A and/or composition B comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof; composition A and/or composition B optionally comprising at least one silicone as defined previously.
Preferably, composition B comprises at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes, and mixtures thereof, and composition A does not comprise any colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes, and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, compositions A and B are mixed preferably less than 15 minutes before application to the hair keratin fibers, more preferentially less than 10 minutes before application, better still less than 5 minutes before application.
The weight ratio between composition A and composition B preferably ranges from 0.1 to 10, preferentially from 0.2 to 5 and better still from 0.5 to 2, or even from 0.6 to 1.5. In a particular embodiment, the weight ratio between composition A and composition B is equal to 1.
According to a particular embodiment, the colour-removing process is a process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, such as the hair, notably comprising a step of extemporaneous mixing at the time of use of at least two compositions A and B to obtain the hair colouring composition C as defined above and in applying the hair colouring composition C to the hair keratin fibers, with:
- composition A comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound as described previously;
- composition B comprising at least one compound, different from the associative polymers as described previously, containing at least one carboxylic acid group as described previously, and at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes, and mixtures thereof; composition A and/or composition B optionally comprising at least one silicone as defined previously, and a composition D as described previously being applied to the hair keratin fibers before and/or after, preferably after, the application of the mixture of compositions A and B to the hair keratin fibers.
Next, as indicated previously, the process according to the invention comprises the application of at least one composition for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers, as defined above, which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition as defined above. Preferably, the colour-removing composition is then rinsed out after an optional leave-on time, optionally followed by shampoo washing.
Preferably, the colour-removing composition is left on for 30 seconds to 60 minutes, preferentially from 1 to 30 minutes, more preferentially from 1 to 15 minutes and better still from 2 to 10 minutes, before being rinsed out.
According to a particular embodiment, the process according to the invention also comprises a step of massaging the hair keratin fibers, after the application of the colour-removing composition.
During this massaging step, a particular tool such as an exfoliating glove may be used.
Preferably, during a massaging step, the fingers are passed along the lock five times. The total duration of the five passes may range from 30 seconds to 2 minutes, for example, per 1 g of lock.
The step of massaging the hair keratin fibers may be repeated several times, for example twice, optionally with an intermediate leave-on time.
The step of applying the colour-removing composition may be repeated several times, optionally with intermediate rinsing.
The time between the step of applying the hair colouring composition and the step of applying the colour-removing composition may range from a few minutes to several days, for example several tens of days. Preferably, the time between the step of applying the hair colouring composition and the step of applying the colour-removing composition ranges from 1 hour to 30 days, more preferentially from 1 day to 15 days.
The optional massaging step may subsequently be followed by a step of washing the hair keratin fibers, for example using a shampoo. The hair keratin fibers may then be massaged, rinsed and dried.
Colour-removing composition
The invention also relates to a composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
- at least 0.5% by weight of at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition;
- at least 35% by weight of at least one polyol relative to the total weight of the colour- removing composition. Preferably, the hair colouring composition is the hair colouring composition used in the context of the process according to the invention.
Preferably, the cationic surfactant and the polyol are as defined above, respectively.
Advantageously, the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants, are present in a total content ranging from 0.5% to 5% by weight, better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
Advantageously, the polyol(s) are present in a total content ranging from 35% to 95% by weight, more preferentially from 35% to 85% by weight, and even more preferentially from 35% to 70% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour- removing composition.
The colour-removing composition according to the invention may also comprise at least one alkyl or alkylene carbonate as described previously.
Advantageously, when it is (they are) present, the content of alkyl or alkylene carbonate(s) ranges from 10% to 60% by weight, preferably from 15% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
The colour-removing composition according to the invention may also comprise at least one glycol ether different from the polyols as described previously.
The total content of glycol ether(s), when it is (they are) present, preferably ranges from 5% to 30% by weight, preferably from 5% to 15% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
Preferably, the other ingredients that may be included in the colour-removing composition as used in the context of the process according to the invention, as described above, may be included in the colour-removing composition according to the invention.
Use
The present invention also relates to the use of the composition for removing hair colour, according to the invention or as used in the context of the process according to the invention, from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
Preferably, the hair colouring composition is as defined above. The present invention will now be described more specifically by means of examples, which do not in any way limit the scope of the invention. However, the examples make it possible to support specific characteristics, variants and preferred embodiments of the invention.
Examples
The (poly)carbodiimide(s) of the invention are accessible via synthetic methods known to those skilled in the art starting from commercial products or reagents that can be synthesized according to chemical reactions that are also known to those skilled in the art. Mention may be made, for example, of the book Sciences of Synthesis - Houben - Weyl Methods of Molecular Transformations, 2005, Georg Thiem Verlag Kg, Rudigerstrasse 14, D-70469 Stuttgart, or the American patent US 4 284730 or the Canadian patent application CA 2 509 861. More particularly, the process for preparing the (poly)carbodiimides of the invention involves, in a first step, a diisocyanate reagent (1):
0=C=N-Li-N=C=0 (1), in which formula (1) Li is as defined previously, which reacts in the presence of a carboimidation catalyst (2) such as those described in US 4 284 730, notably phosphorus-based catalysts particularly chosen from phospholene oxides and phospholene sulfoxides, diaza- and oxaza-phospholanes, preferably under an inert atmosphere (nitrogen or argon), and in particular in a polar solvent which is preferably aprotic such as THF, glyme, diglyme, 1,4-dioxane or DMF, at a temperature between room temperature and the reflux temperature of the solvent, preferably at about 140°C; to give the carbodiimide diisocyanate compound (3):
0=C=N-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-N=C=0 (3), in which formula (3) Li and n are as defined previously. Benzoyl halogen such as benzoyl chloride may be added to deactivate the catalyst.
To obtain “symmetrical” (poly)carbodiimides, during the second step of the preparation process, compound (3) reacts with 1 molar equivalent (1 eq.) of nucleophilic reagent Ri-Xi-H and then 0.5 eq. of reagent H-E-H with Ri, Xi and E as defined previously, to give the “symmetrical” compound (4) according to the invention:
[Ri-Xi-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-NH-C(0)]2-E (4), in which formula (4) Ri, Xi, Li, n and E are as defined previously. According to one variant to obtain compound (4) from (3), it is possible first to add 0.5 eq. of reagent H-E-H and then 1 eq. of reagent Ri-Xi-H.
To obtain “dissymmetrical” (poly)carbodiimides, during the second step of the preparation process, compound (3) reacts with 1 molar equivalent (1 eq.) of nucleophilic reagent Ri-Xi-H and then 1 eq. of reagent H-E-H with Ri, Xi and E as defined previously, to give compound (5):
Ri-Xi-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-NH-C(0)-E-H (5), in which formula (5) Ri, Xi, Li, n and E are as defined previously.
According to one variant to obtain compound (5) from (3), it is possible first to add 1 eq. of reagent Ri-Xi-H and then 0.5 eq. of reagent H-E-H.
During a third step, compound (5) reacts with 1 eq. of compound (6) R2-X2-C(0)-NH-LI-(N=C=N-LI)Z-N=C=0 (6), said compound (6) is prepared beforehand from compound (3’)
0=C=N-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-N=C=0 (3’), in which formula (3’) Li and z are as defined previously, which reacts with 1 eq. of nucleophilic reagent R2-X2-H with Li, R2, X2 and z as defined previously, to give the dissymmetrical compound (7):
Ri-Xi-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-NH-C(0)-E-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N-Li)z-NH- C(0)-X2-R2 (7), in which formula (7) Ri, Xi, Li, R2, X2, n, z and E are as defined previously.
It is also possible to react 1 molar equivalent of compound 0=C=N-Li- (N=C=N-Li)z-N=C=0 (3’) with 1/w molar equivalent of H-E-H, followed by 1 eq. of nucleophilic reagent R2-X2-H to give compound (8):
H-[E-C(0)-NH-LI-(N=C=N-LI)Z]W-NH-C(0)-X2-R2 (8), in which formula (8) Li, R2, X2, z and E are as defined previously, and w is an integer between 1 and 3; more preferentially, w = 1.
This last compound (8) can then react with 1 eq. of compound (4’): Ri-Xi-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-N=C=0 (4’), (said compound (4’) being able to be synthesized by reaction of 0.5 eq. of nucleophilic reagent R1-X1-H with 1 equivalent of compound (3)), to give the (poly)carbodiimide (9) of the invention:
Ri-Xi-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N-Li)n-NH-C(0)-[E-C(0)-NH-Li-(N=C=N- Li)z]w-NH C(0)-X2-R2 (9), in which formula (9) Li, Ri, Xi, R2, X2, n, z, w and E are as defined previously. The (poly)carbodiimide compounds, and similarly all the reaction intermediates and reagents, may be purified via conventional methods known to those skilled in the art, such as extraction with water and water-immiscible organic solvent, precipitation, centrifugation, filtration and/or chromatography.
Example 1: Process for synthesizing the (poly)carbodiimide compound
50 g of 4,4’-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate and 0.5 g of 4, 5 -dihydro-3 - methyl-l-phenyl-lH-phosphole 1-oxide were placed with stirring in a 500 mL three necked round-bottomed flask equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer and a reflux tube. The reaction medium was heated at 140°C under nitrogen for 4 hours, the reaction being monitored by infrared spectroscopy by means of the absorption of the isocyanate functions between 2200 and 2300 cm 1, and then cooled to 120°C.
A mixture of 5.3 g of polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether and 1.2 g of 1,4- butanediol are introduced with stirring into the reaction medium. The temperature of 120°C is maintained until the isocyanate functions have totally disappeared, monitored by infrared spectroscopy at 2200-2300 cm 1, and is then cooled to room temperature.
After cooling to room temperature, the reaction medium is poured dropwise with vigorous stirring into a 500 mL glass beaker containing 85 g of distilled water, to give the desired product in the form of a translucent yellow liquid.
Example 2:
Compositions A and B as described below were prepared: the amounts are expressed as g of starting material as obtained/100 g.
[Table 1]
Figure imgf000105_0001
(1) synthesized according to the synthetic process described in example 1 (containing 40% active material in water),
(2) sold by the company SEPPIC under the name Sepinov EMTIO,
(3) sold by the company Wacker under the name Belsil ADM LOG 1 (containing 15% active material).
[Table 21
Figure imgf000106_0001
(4) sold by the company Daito Kasei Kogyo under the trade name Daitosol 3000SLPN- PE1 (aqueous dispersion containing 30% active material)
(5) sold by the company Rohm & Haas under the trade name Aculyn 22® (methacrylic acid/ethyl acrylate/oxyalkylenated stearyl methacrylate terpolymer) (30% active material).
Composition A is mixed with composition B in a 50/50 mass ratio (0.4 g for composition A and 0.4 g for composition B) to obtain a composition C. Thus, composition C is a hair colouring composition according to the invention.
Next, composition D as described below was prepared: the amounts are expressed as g of starting material as obtained/100 g.
[Table 3]
Figure imgf000106_0002
(6) sold by the company Momentive Performance Materials under the trade name Silform INX
Colour-removing compositions In parallel, several colour-removing compositions according to the invention are prepared and are described in the table below. The amounts are expressed as grams of active material/ 100 g: [Table 4]
Figure imgf000107_0001
Thus, compositions El to E4 are colour-removing compositions according to the invention.
Protocol for colouring locks of hair:
Composition C is applied to locks of dry natural hair containing 90% white hairs, at a rate of 0.8 g of composition per gram of lock.
The locks of hair are then dried with a hairdryer, and then combed.
Next, composition D is applied to said locks of dry hair treated with composition C, in a proportion of 0.5 g of composition per gram of lock.
The locks of hair thus coloured are subsequently stored at 60°C for 48 hours, and then undergo a colour removal treatment.
The locks of hair coloured with composition C are treated with each of the compositions El to E4.
Protocol for treating locks of hair Each of the compositions El to E4 is applied to a lock of coloured hair at a rate of 2 g of composition per gram of lock. The locks of hair are pinched between two fingers with exfoliant gloves six times from the root to the end, and are then massaged six times between two fingers from the root to the end. The two actions are alternated for five minutes. Next, the exfoliant gloves are removed and the locks of hair are then rinsed with water.
The locks are then washed with a multivitamin shampoo (Elseve Multivitamines). Fingers are passed along the lock six times with 0.4 g of multivitamin shampoo per gram of lock.
The locks are then rinsed with water and dried.
The colour-removing (or decolourizing) power is then evaluated on a scale from 1 to 5. A score of 1 denotes excellent colour-removing power. A score of 5 denotes poor colour-removing power. The results are described in the table below: [Table 5]
Figure imgf000108_0001
It is observed that the colour-removing compositions El to E4 according to the invention have excellent decolourizing power (or colour-removing power). The best results are obtained for compositions E3 and E4.
Thus, the process according to the invention makes it possible to improve the removal of the colour from a lock of hair which has been coloured beforehand using a hair colouring composition comprising a (poly)carbodiimide compound and a colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.

Claims

1. Process for removing hair colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand, comprising the application of at least one colour-removing composition to said hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand using at least one hair colouring composition comprising:
- at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound; and
- at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof; said colour-removing composition comprising:
- at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant; and
- at least one polyol.
2. Process according to Claim 1, characterized in that the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (I) below:
Figure imgf000109_0001
in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
- Ri and R2 independently represent a group chosen from a hydrocarbon-based radical, preferably alkyl, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, a group chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonylalkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups, and a hydrocarbon-based radical, preferably alkyl, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms and with one or more groups chosen from alkoxysilyl, hydroxysilyl, acetoxysilyl, vinylsilyl, acrylalkylsilyl, methacrylalkylsilyl, crotonylalkylsilyl, carboxyanhydridoalkylsilyl, carboxyalkylsilyl, hydroxyalkylsilyl, aldehydoalkylsilyl, mercaptoalkylsilyl, norbornenylsilyl, acylpentadienylalkylsilyl, maleimidoalkylsilyl, sulfonylalkylsilyl, (meth)acrylalkyl, crotonyl alkyl, alkylepoxide such as propylepoxide or butylepoxide and azacyclopropane groups;
- n denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 1000; and
- A is a monomer chosen from the compounds below:
Figure imgf000110_0001
3. Process according to Claim 1, characterized in that the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) below:
Figure imgf000111_0001
(P), in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom O, a sulfur atom S or an NH group;
- Ri and R2 independently represent a hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w denotes an integer ranging from 1 to 3;
- Li independently represents a C1-C18 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof;
- E independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon-based radical optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- R5 independently represents a covalent bond or a saturated divalent hydrocarbon- based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms;
- R6 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon-based radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
4. Process according to Claim 3, characterized in that the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom; - Ri and R2 are independently chosen from dialkylamino alcohols, alkyl esters of hydroxycarboxylic acid and monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed, and mixtures thereof;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
- LI is chosen from a Ci-Cis divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon-based radical, a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical, a C3-C12 heterocycloalkylene group or a C6-C14 arylene group, and mixtures thereof;
- E independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
- when R5 is not a covalent bond, Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof; and
- R6 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
5. Process according to either of Claims 3 and 4, characterized in that the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 are, independently, monoalkyl ethers of (poly)alkylene glycol, in which a hydroxyl group has been removed;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z > 2 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is a C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical;
- E independently represents a group chosen from:
- -O-R3-O-; -S-R4-S-; -R5-N(R6)-R4-N(R6)-R5-; in which R3 and R4 are independently chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof;
- when R5 is not a covalent bond, Rs is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof; and - Re is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
6. Process according to any one of Claims 3 to 5, characterized in that the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 independently represent the compound of formula (VI) below:
Rl3-[0-CH2-C(H)(Rl4)]q- (VI), in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 2 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is an C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene, cyclohexylene and 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane; and
- E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 is chosen from a C6-C14 arylene radical, a C3-C12 cycloalkylene radical, a linear or branched C I-C IX alkylene radical, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and mixtures thereof.
7. Process according to any one of Claims 3 to 6, characterized in that the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (II) in which:
- Xi and X2 independently represent an oxygen atom;
- Ri and R2 independently represent the compound of formula (VI) below:
Ri3-[0-CH2-C(H)(Ri4)]q- (VI), in which R13 represents a C1-C4 alkyl group or a phenyl, preferably a C1-C4 alkyl group, more preferentially a methyl, Ri4 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom and q denotes an integer ranging from 4 to 30;
- n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10 and w is equal to 1;
- Li is an C3-C15 cycloalkylene radical such as cyclopentylene, cycloheptylene, cyclohexylene and 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane, preferably 4,4- dicyclohexylenemethane; and - E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, propylene, butylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms.
8. Process according to any one of Claims 3 to 7, characterized in that the
(poly)carbodiimide compound(s) are chosen from the compounds of formula (XII) below:
Figure imgf000114_0001
in which Li is 4,4-dicyclohexylenemethane, n and z denote an integer ranging from 1 to 20, with n+z ranging from 4 to 10, E represents a group -O-R3-O- in which R3 represents a linear or branched Ci-Cis alkylene radical such as methylene, propylene, butylene or ethylene, optionally interrupted with one or more heteroatoms, and r and s denote an integer ranging from 4 to 30.
9. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the total amount of the (poly)carbodiimide compound(s) ranges from 0.01% to 30% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 25% by weight, better still from 0.2% to 20% by weight and even better still from 1% to 10% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
10. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the content of colouring agent(s) ranges from 0.001% to 20% by weight and preferably from 0.005% to 15% by weight relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition; preferably, the colouring agent(s) are chosen from pigments.
11. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the content of pigments ranges from 0.05% to 20% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 15% by weight and better still from 0.5% to 10% by weight, relative to the total weight of the hair colouring composition.
12. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that it also comprises a step of applying to the hair keratin fibers a composition D comprising at least one silicone compound comprising at least one carboxylic group, the application of said composition D taking place before the application of the colour- removing composition.
13. Process according to the preceding claim, characterized in that the total amount of the silicone compound(s) comprising at least one carboxylic group present in composition D ranges from 0.01% to 20% by weight, more preferentially from 0.1% to 15% by weight and better still from 0.5% to 10% by weight, relative to the total weight of composition D.
14. Process according to Claim 12 or 13, characterized in that composition D also comprises one or more oil(s), preferably chosen from Cx-Cir> alkanes, more preferentially from isododecane, isohexadecane, tetradecane and/or mixtures thereof.
15. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the surfactant(s) are chosen from cationic surfactants; preferably, the cationic surfactant(s) are chosen from
- those corresponding to formula (XXXII) below: X
Figure imgf000116_0001
(XXXII), in which:
- the groups Ri to R4, which may be identical or different, represent a linear or branched aliphatic group including from 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aromatic group such as aryl or alkylaryl, at least one of the groups Ri to R4 denoting a linear or branched aliphatic radical including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, preferably from 12 to 24 carbon atoms,
- X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, phosphates, acetates, lactates, (Ci- C4)alkyl sulfates, (Ci-C4)alkylsulfonates or (Ci-C4)alkylarylsulfonates,
- quaternary ammonium salts of imidazoline, for instance those of formula (XXXIII) below:
Figure imgf000116_0003
(XXXIII), in which:
- R? represents an alkenyl or alkyl group including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms, for example derived from tallow fatty acids,
- Re represents a hydrogen atom, a C1-C4 alkyl group or an alkenyl or alkyl group including from 8 to 30 carbon atoms,
- R? represents a C1-C4 alkyl group,
- R-8 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group,
- X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, phosphates, acetates, lactates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfonates or alkylarylsulfonates in which the alkyl and aryl groups preferably comprise, respectively, from 1 to 20 carbon atoms and from 6 to 30 carbon atoms,
- quaternary diammonium or triammonium salts, in particular of formula (XXXIV):
Figure imgf000116_0002
in which: - R9 denotes an alkyl radical including from about 16 to 30 carbon atoms, which is optionally hydroxylated and/or optionally interrupted with one or more oxygen atoms,
- Rio is chosen from hydrogen or an alkyl radical including from 1 to 4 carbon atoms Or a group (R9a)(Rl0a)(Rlla)N-(CH2)3, - R9a, Rioa, Riia, Rii, Ri2, Ri3 and Ri4, which may be identical or different, are chosen from hydrogen or an alkyl radical including from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
- X is an anion chosen from the group of halides, acetates, phosphates, nitrates, (Ci- C4)alkyl sulfates, (Ci-C4)alkylsulfonates and (Ci-C4)alkylarylsulfonates, in particular methyl sulfate and ethyl sulfate, - quaternary ammonium salts containing at least one ester function, such as those of formula (XXXV) below:
Figure imgf000117_0001
in which: - Ri5 is chosen from C1-C6 alkyl groups and C1-C6 hydroxyalkyl or dihydroxyalkyl groups,
- Ri6 is chosen from: the group
Figure imgf000117_0002
the groups R20, which are linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-C22 hydrocarbon-based groups, a hydrogen atom,
- R18 is chosen from: the group
Figure imgf000117_0003
the groups R22, which are linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-C6 hydrocarbon-based groups, a hydrogen atom,
- Ri7, Ri9 and R21, which may be identical or different, are chosen from linear or branched, saturated or unsaturated C7-C21 hydrocarbon-based groups;
- r, s and t, which may be identical or different, are integers ranging from 2 to 6; - y is an integer ranging from 1 to 10;
- x and z, which may be identical or different, are integers ranging from 0 to 10;
- X is a simple or complex, organic or mineral anion; with the proviso that the sum x + y + z is from 1 to 15, that when x is 0 then Ri6 denotes R20, and that when z is 0 then Ris denotes R22.
16. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the cationic surfactant(s) are chosen from those of formula (XXXII) and those of formula (XXXV), preferably from those of formula (XXXII), more preferentially from behenyltrimethylammonium salts, cetyltrimethylammonium salts, and a mixture thereof, and even more preferentially from behenyltrimethylammonium chloride, cetyltrimethylammonium chloride, and a mixture thereof.
17. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the surfactant(s), preferably the cationic surfactants, are present in a total content ranging from 0.05% to 15% by weight, preferably from 0.1% to 10% by weight, more preferentially from 0.5% to 5% by weight, and better still from 0.75% to 3% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
18. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the polyol(s) are chosen from diglycerol, glycerol, propylene glycol, propane-1, 3- diol, 1,3-butylene glycol, pentane- 1,2-diol, octane- 1,2-diol, dipropylene glycol, hexylene glycol, ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, sorbitol, sugars, such as glucose, and mixtures thereof, preferably from propylene glycol.
19. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the polyol(s) are present in a total content of at least 35% by weight, preferably ranging from 35% to 95% by weight, more preferentially from 35% to 85% by weight, and even more preferentially from 35% to 70% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
20. Process according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the colour-removing composition also comprises at least one alkyl or alkylene carbonate; preferably, the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is a C1-C30, preferably C1-C6 alkyl or C1-C30, preferably C1-C6 alkylene carbonate; more preferentially, the alkyl or alkylene carbonate is chosen from alkylene carbonates, better still from propylene carbonate, butylene carbonate, pentylene carbonate and mixtures thereof.
21. Process according to the preceding claim, characterized in that the content of alkyl or alkylene carbonate ranges from 10% to 60% by weight, preferably from 15% to 50% by weight, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition.
22. Composition for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof, comprising:
- at least 0.5% by weight of at least one surfactant, preferably a cationic surfactant, relative to the total weight of the colour-removing composition; - at least 35% by weight of at least one polyol relative to the weight of the colour- removing composition.
23. Use of the colour-removing composition, as defined in any one of Claims 1 to 21 or according to Claim 22, on hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a hair colouring composition comprising at least one colouring agent chosen from pigments, direct dyes and mixtures thereof.
PCT/EP2022/056196 2021-03-10 2022-03-10 Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition WO2022189571A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
FRFR2102355 2021-03-10
FR2102355A FR3120533A1 (en) 2021-03-10 2021-03-10 Process for removing the color from hair keratin fibers which have been previously colored with a specific hair coloring composition

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022189571A1 true WO2022189571A1 (en) 2022-09-15

Family

ID=77180063

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2022/056196 WO2022189571A1 (en) 2021-03-10 2022-03-10 Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition

Country Status (2)

Country Link
FR (1) FR3120533A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2022189571A1 (en)

Citations (39)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3412054A (en) 1966-10-31 1968-11-19 Union Carbide Corp Water-dilutable polyurethanes
US3915921A (en) 1974-07-02 1975-10-28 Goodrich Co B F Unsaturated carboxylic acid-long chain alkyl ester copolymers and tri-polymers water thickening agents and emulsifiers
US4137180A (en) 1976-07-02 1979-01-30 Lever Brothers Company Fabric treatment materials
US4185087A (en) 1977-12-28 1980-01-22 Union Carbide Corporation Hair conditioning compositions containing dialkylamino hydroxy organosilicon compounds and their derivatives
US4284730A (en) 1980-02-07 1981-08-18 Basf Wyandotte Corporation Liquid carbodiimide- and uretonimine-isocyanurate-containing polyisocyanate compositions and microcellular foams made therefrom
US4509949A (en) 1983-06-13 1985-04-09 The B. F. Goodrich Company Water thickening agents consisting of copolymers of crosslinked acrylic acids and esters
EP0173109A2 (en) 1984-08-23 1986-03-05 DeSOTO, INC. Alkali soluble latex thickeners
US4578266A (en) 1983-07-29 1986-03-25 Revlon, Inc. Silicone-based cosmetic products containing pigment
EP0186507A2 (en) 1984-12-22 1986-07-02 Chisso Corporation Carboxyl group-containing siloxane compounds
US4874554A (en) 1986-07-10 1989-10-17 Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien Quaternary ammonium compounds
EP0342834A2 (en) 1988-05-17 1989-11-23 Dow Corning Limited Treatment of fibrous materials
US4957732A (en) 1988-12-29 1990-09-18 L'oreal Shaving composition for the skin based on polyorgano-siloxanes containing an acyloxyalkyl group and process for use
US5089578A (en) 1986-03-28 1992-02-18 Exxon Research And Engineering Company Hydrophobically associating terpolymers containing sulfonate functionality
JPH0517710A (en) 1991-07-08 1993-01-26 Kansai Paint Co Ltd Metallic paint and method for coating therewith
FR2679771A1 (en) 1991-08-01 1993-02-05 Oreal Use of an insoluble pigment obtained by oxidative polymerisation of indole derivatives for the temporary dyeing of keratinous fibres
EP0530974A1 (en) 1991-08-05 1993-03-10 Unilever Plc Hair care composition
WO1995001772A1 (en) 1993-07-05 1995-01-19 Ciba-Geigy Ag Process for dyeing keratin-containing fibres
WO1995015144A1 (en) 1993-11-30 1995-06-08 Ciba-Geigy Ag Cationic dyes for keratin-containing fibres
JPH07258460A (en) 1994-03-22 1995-10-09 Teijin Chem Ltd Resin composition
EP0714954A2 (en) 1994-11-03 1996-06-05 Ciba-Geigy Ag Cationic iminazoleazodyestuffs
EP0750899A2 (en) 1995-06-30 1997-01-02 Shiseido Company Limited An emulsifier or solubilizer which consists of a water soluble amphiphilic polyelectrolyte, and an emulsified composition or a solubilized composition and an emulsified cosmetic or a solubilized cosmetic containing it
JPH09188830A (en) 1996-01-05 1997-07-22 Nisshin Steel Co Ltd Highly bright metallic pigment
JPH10158450A (en) 1996-11-28 1998-06-16 Shin Etsu Polymer Co Ltd Polyvinyl chloride resin composition for food packaging
JPH10158541A (en) 1996-11-27 1998-06-16 Nisshin Steel Co Ltd Dark silver color metallic pigment excellent in weather resistance and brilliance
WO2000031154A1 (en) 1998-11-23 2000-06-02 Sofitech N.V. Invertible emulsions stabilised by amphiphilic polymers and application to bore fluids
EP1184426A2 (en) 2000-09-01 2002-03-06 Toda Kogyo Corporation Composite particles, process for producing the same, and pigment, paint and resin composition using the same
JP2003081810A (en) * 2001-06-25 2003-03-19 Kanebo Ltd Cosmetic for removing dyeing for acid hair dye
CA2509861A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2005-12-17 Bayer Materialscience Llc Improved process for the production of carbodiimide modified organic isocyanates
WO2007068371A1 (en) 2005-12-14 2007-06-21 Cognis Ip Management Gmbh Method for producing hydrocarbons
US7445770B2 (en) 2007-03-14 2008-11-04 Bayer Materialscience Llc Polyurethane dispersions for use in personal care products
US7452770B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2008-11-18 Micron Technology, Inc. Reduced cell-to-cell shorting for memory arrays
WO2008155059A2 (en) 2007-06-19 2008-12-24 Cognis Ip Management Gmbh Hydrocarbon mixtures and use thereof
JP2013133445A (en) * 2011-12-27 2013-07-08 Nippon Paint Co Ltd Aqueous coating composition
WO2015088126A1 (en) * 2013-12-09 2015-06-18 주식회사 엘지생활건강 Composition containing carbodiimide-based compound
US20170112743A1 (en) * 2014-07-09 2017-04-27 Henkel Ag & Co. Kgaa Decolorization of dyed keratin fibers
FR3045343A1 (en) * 2015-12-22 2017-06-23 Oreal OXIDIZING COMPOSITION COMPRISING AT LEAST 30% SURFACTANTS
WO2017117522A1 (en) * 2015-12-31 2017-07-06 L'oreal Compositions containing polycarbodiimides and amino compounds for treating keratinous substrates
US10456606B2 (en) * 2014-07-09 2019-10-29 Henkel Ag & Co. Kgaa Decolorization of colored keratinic fibers
WO2021028095A1 (en) * 2019-08-14 2021-02-18 Henkel Ag & Co. Kgaa Method for the decolorization of keratin material that has been dyed using an organosilicon compound and a pigment

Patent Citations (39)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3412054A (en) 1966-10-31 1968-11-19 Union Carbide Corp Water-dilutable polyurethanes
US3915921A (en) 1974-07-02 1975-10-28 Goodrich Co B F Unsaturated carboxylic acid-long chain alkyl ester copolymers and tri-polymers water thickening agents and emulsifiers
US4137180A (en) 1976-07-02 1979-01-30 Lever Brothers Company Fabric treatment materials
US4185087A (en) 1977-12-28 1980-01-22 Union Carbide Corporation Hair conditioning compositions containing dialkylamino hydroxy organosilicon compounds and their derivatives
US4284730A (en) 1980-02-07 1981-08-18 Basf Wyandotte Corporation Liquid carbodiimide- and uretonimine-isocyanurate-containing polyisocyanate compositions and microcellular foams made therefrom
US4509949A (en) 1983-06-13 1985-04-09 The B. F. Goodrich Company Water thickening agents consisting of copolymers of crosslinked acrylic acids and esters
US4578266A (en) 1983-07-29 1986-03-25 Revlon, Inc. Silicone-based cosmetic products containing pigment
EP0173109A2 (en) 1984-08-23 1986-03-05 DeSOTO, INC. Alkali soluble latex thickeners
EP0186507A2 (en) 1984-12-22 1986-07-02 Chisso Corporation Carboxyl group-containing siloxane compounds
US5089578A (en) 1986-03-28 1992-02-18 Exxon Research And Engineering Company Hydrophobically associating terpolymers containing sulfonate functionality
US4874554A (en) 1986-07-10 1989-10-17 Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien Quaternary ammonium compounds
EP0342834A2 (en) 1988-05-17 1989-11-23 Dow Corning Limited Treatment of fibrous materials
US4957732A (en) 1988-12-29 1990-09-18 L'oreal Shaving composition for the skin based on polyorgano-siloxanes containing an acyloxyalkyl group and process for use
JPH0517710A (en) 1991-07-08 1993-01-26 Kansai Paint Co Ltd Metallic paint and method for coating therewith
FR2679771A1 (en) 1991-08-01 1993-02-05 Oreal Use of an insoluble pigment obtained by oxidative polymerisation of indole derivatives for the temporary dyeing of keratinous fibres
EP0530974A1 (en) 1991-08-05 1993-03-10 Unilever Plc Hair care composition
WO1995001772A1 (en) 1993-07-05 1995-01-19 Ciba-Geigy Ag Process for dyeing keratin-containing fibres
WO1995015144A1 (en) 1993-11-30 1995-06-08 Ciba-Geigy Ag Cationic dyes for keratin-containing fibres
JPH07258460A (en) 1994-03-22 1995-10-09 Teijin Chem Ltd Resin composition
EP0714954A2 (en) 1994-11-03 1996-06-05 Ciba-Geigy Ag Cationic iminazoleazodyestuffs
EP0750899A2 (en) 1995-06-30 1997-01-02 Shiseido Company Limited An emulsifier or solubilizer which consists of a water soluble amphiphilic polyelectrolyte, and an emulsified composition or a solubilized composition and an emulsified cosmetic or a solubilized cosmetic containing it
JPH09188830A (en) 1996-01-05 1997-07-22 Nisshin Steel Co Ltd Highly bright metallic pigment
JPH10158541A (en) 1996-11-27 1998-06-16 Nisshin Steel Co Ltd Dark silver color metallic pigment excellent in weather resistance and brilliance
JPH10158450A (en) 1996-11-28 1998-06-16 Shin Etsu Polymer Co Ltd Polyvinyl chloride resin composition for food packaging
WO2000031154A1 (en) 1998-11-23 2000-06-02 Sofitech N.V. Invertible emulsions stabilised by amphiphilic polymers and application to bore fluids
EP1184426A2 (en) 2000-09-01 2002-03-06 Toda Kogyo Corporation Composite particles, process for producing the same, and pigment, paint and resin composition using the same
JP2003081810A (en) * 2001-06-25 2003-03-19 Kanebo Ltd Cosmetic for removing dyeing for acid hair dye
US7452770B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2008-11-18 Micron Technology, Inc. Reduced cell-to-cell shorting for memory arrays
CA2509861A1 (en) 2004-06-17 2005-12-17 Bayer Materialscience Llc Improved process for the production of carbodiimide modified organic isocyanates
WO2007068371A1 (en) 2005-12-14 2007-06-21 Cognis Ip Management Gmbh Method for producing hydrocarbons
US7445770B2 (en) 2007-03-14 2008-11-04 Bayer Materialscience Llc Polyurethane dispersions for use in personal care products
WO2008155059A2 (en) 2007-06-19 2008-12-24 Cognis Ip Management Gmbh Hydrocarbon mixtures and use thereof
JP2013133445A (en) * 2011-12-27 2013-07-08 Nippon Paint Co Ltd Aqueous coating composition
WO2015088126A1 (en) * 2013-12-09 2015-06-18 주식회사 엘지생활건강 Composition containing carbodiimide-based compound
US20170112743A1 (en) * 2014-07-09 2017-04-27 Henkel Ag & Co. Kgaa Decolorization of dyed keratin fibers
US10456606B2 (en) * 2014-07-09 2019-10-29 Henkel Ag & Co. Kgaa Decolorization of colored keratinic fibers
FR3045343A1 (en) * 2015-12-22 2017-06-23 Oreal OXIDIZING COMPOSITION COMPRISING AT LEAST 30% SURFACTANTS
WO2017117522A1 (en) * 2015-12-31 2017-07-06 L'oreal Compositions containing polycarbodiimides and amino compounds for treating keratinous substrates
WO2021028095A1 (en) * 2019-08-14 2021-02-18 Henkel Ag & Co. Kgaa Method for the decolorization of keratin material that has been dyed using an organosilicon compound and a pigment

Non-Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Houben - Weyl Methods of Molecular Transformations", 2005, GEORG THIEM VERLAG KG, article "Sciences of Synthesis"
CHINESE JOURNAL OF POLYMER SCIENCE, vol. 18, no. 40, 2000, pages 323 - 336
COSMETICS AND TOILETRIES, vol. 105, February 1990 (1990-02-01), pages 53 - 64
COSMETICS AND TOILETRIES, vol. 91, pages 27 - 32
KIRK-OTHMER, ENCYCLOPEDIA OF CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY AND IN ULLMANN'S ENCYCLOPEDIA OF INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY
LANGMUIR, vol. 16, no. 12, 2000, pages 5324 - 5332
MACROMOLECULES, vol. 33, no. 10, 2010, pages 3694 - 3704
POLYM. PREPRINT, DIV. POLYM. CHEM., vol. 40, no. 2, 1999, pages 220 - 221
TODDBYERS: "Silicones falling within this category are also described in the article published in Cosmetics and Toiletries", VOLATILE SILICONE FLUIDS FOR COSMETICS, vol. 91, pages 27 - 32
WALTER NOLL: "Chemistry and Technology of Silicones", 1968, ACADEMIC PRESS

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
FR3120533A1 (en) 2022-09-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021099515A1 (en) Process for treating keratin fibers, comprising a (poly)carbodiimide compound, an aqueous dispersion of particles of polymer(s)and a coloring agent
JP7401673B2 (en) Composition containing a (poly)carbodiimide compound and a colorant
WO2022189576A1 (en) Hair colouring composition comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound and at least one non-carboxylic anionic thickener
WO2022258494A1 (en) Hair dyeing process comprising the application of a (poly)carbodiimide compound, of a polymer bearing a carboxylic group and of a non-silicone fatty substance
EP4304734A1 (en) Process for colouring hair keratin fibers, comprising the application of a composition comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound and a composition comprising at least one associative polymer and a particular compound
WO2022189573A1 (en) Hair colouring composition comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound and at least one compound comprising at least one hydroxyl function
WO2022189572A1 (en) Process for removing the colour from previously coloured hair keratin fibers
EP4304736A1 (en) Process for colouring hair keratin fibers comprising the application of a composition comprising at least one (poly)carbodiimide compound and a composition comprising at least one associative polymer and a particular compound
WO2022189571A1 (en) Process for removing the colour from hair keratin fibers which have been coloured beforehand with a specific hair colouring composition
JP7556029B2 (en) Method for treating keratin fibers comprising a (poly)carbodiimide compound, an aqueous dispersion of polymer particles and a colorant
WO2024003305A1 (en) Use of a composition comprising an alkyl or alkylene carbonate for removing the colour from previously dyed keratinous hair fibres without damaging the keratinous hair fibres
WO2024003303A1 (en) Process for removing the colour from previously dyed keratinous hair fibres
WO2024133696A1 (en) Process for dyeing keratin hair fibers comprising the application of a (poly)carbodiimide compound, a compound containing at least one carboxylic acid group, an amino silicone and a colouring agent.
WO2024133693A1 (en) Process for dyeing keratin hair fibers comprising the application of a particular composition t and the application of a (poly)carbodiimide compound and a colouring agent
BR112022009875B1 (en) PROCESS FOR DYEING HAIR AND DEVICES FOR HAIR TREATMENT

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22711985

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22711985

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1